Ricoh Aficio MP C3001 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. Aficio MP C3001
  6. Service manual

Ricoh Aficio MP C3001 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for Aficio MP C3001:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

D086/D087
SERVICE MANUAL
006185MIU
MAINFRAME

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh Aficio MP C3001

Summary of Contents for Ricoh Aficio MP C3001

  • Page 1 D086/D087 SERVICE MANUAL 006185MIU MAINFRAME...
  • Page 5 D086/D087 SERVICE MANUAL (MAINFRAME) 006185MIU...
  • Page 7 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 9 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 11 LEGEND PRODUCT COMPANY CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN D086 MP C3001 LD630C Aficio MP C3001 C9130 D087 MP C3501 LD635C Aficio MP C3501 C9135 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 11/2010 Original Printing...

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    D086/D087 TABLE OF CONTENTS PRODUCT INFORMATION PRODUCT INFORMATION ............1-1     SPECIFICATIONS ..................1-1     PRODUCT OVERVIEW ................1-2     1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............1-2     1.2.2 PAPER PATH ..................1-3     1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................1-4  ...
  • Page 14 Emblem and Decals ................2-13   Initialize the Developer ................ 2-13   Settings Relevant to the Service Contract ........... 2-14   SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting ............ 2-15   Settings for @Remote Service ............2-15   VM Card Installation ................2-20  ...
  • Page 15 2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........... 2-51     2.13 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 (D388) ........... 2-53     2.13.1 COMPONENT CHECK ..............2-53     2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........... 2-53     2.14 SIDE TRAY TYPE C5501 (D542) ............2-55    ...
  • Page 16 For installing the tray heater in the main machine ....... 2-94   For installing the tray heater in D537 ..........2-95   For Installing the Tray Heater in D538 ..........2-97   For Installing the Tray Heater in D387 ..........2-100  ...
  • Page 17 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......... 4-1     BEFOREHAND ................... 4-1     SPECIAL TOOLS ..................4-2     IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ................4-3     4.3.1 SCANNING ..................4-3     Scanner sub-scan magnification ............4-3   Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration ......4-4  ...
  • Page 18 4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ................ 4-24     4.5.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ............4-25     4.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP ................4-26     Reassembling ..................4-27   4.5.4 SCANNER MOTOR ................. 4-28     4.5.5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) ............4-29  ...
  • Page 19 When reinstalling the third duct fan ............. 4-58   4.7.6 TONER PUMP UNIT ............... 4-59     When you install the new toner pump unit .......... 4-62   4.7.7 TONER END SENSOR ..............4-64     IMAGE TRANSFER .................. 4-65  ...
  • Page 20 4.11.1 FUSING UNIT MAINTENANCE PARTS ........4-101     4.11.2 FUSING UNIT ................4-101     4.11.3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE ........4-103     Cleaning Requirement ..............4-103   4.11.4 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE ..4-104    ...
  • Page 21 4.12.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ............4-135     4.12.6 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND BY-PASS PAPER   LENGTH SENSOR ................. 4-136   When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor ......4-137   4.12.7 BY-PASS BOTTOM TRAY ............4-138     4.12.8 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR ..........
  • Page 22 4.14.15 HDD ..................4-167     When installing a new HDD unit ............4-167   Disposal of HDD Units ..............4-168   Reinstallation ..................4-168   4.14.16 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ........ 4-169     NVRAM on the BICU ................. 4-169  ...
  • Page 23 MAIN SP TABLES-7 ................5-265     5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ..............5-265     MAIN SP TABLES-8 ................5-300     5.9.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 ..............5-300     5.10 MAIN SP TABLES-9 ................. 5-355     5.10.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE .............. 5-355  ...
  • Page 24 Firmware Update Error ..............5-399   Recovery after Power Loss ............... 5-400   5.11.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL ..5-400     5.11.5 UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR APP2ME PROVIDER ....5-401     5.11.6 BROWSER UNIT UPDATE PROCEDURE ....... 5-402  ...
  • Page 25 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING ..............6-1     SC TABLES ....................6-1     6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS............6-1     Summary ....................6-1   SC Code Classification ................. 6-2   6.1.2 SC1XX: SCANNING ................6-5     6.1.3 SC 2XX: EXPOSURE ..............6-10  ...
  • Page 26 6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ..............6-112     6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ........... 6-113     Paper Size Code ................6-119   Sensor Locations ................6-120   ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ..........6-121     6.5.1 SENSORS ..................6-121  ...
  • Page 27 FINISHER SR3000(B793) SEE SECTION B793 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS BRIDGE UNIT BU3030D (D386) SEE SECTION D386 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 (D388) SEE SECTION D388 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS FAX OPTION TYPE C5000 (D393) SEE SECTION D393 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS BIN TRAY BN3080 (D536) SEE SECTION D536 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS...

  • Page 29: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS FAX OPTION TYPE C5000 (D393) FAX OPTION TYPE C5501 (D545) ARDF DF3050 (D541) INSTALLATION APPENDIX: PM MAINTENANCE TABLES PAPER FEED UNIT PB3100 (D537) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE APPENDIX: SP MODE TABLES LCIT PB3110 (D538) LCIT PB3010 (D539) REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) BOOKLET FINISHER SR3000 (B793) SYSTEM MAINTENANCE...
  • Page 31 Read This First Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
  • Page 32 Observance of Electrical Safety Standards The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an explosion might occur.
  • Page 33 Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer.
  • Page 34 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ® ® ®...

  • Page 35: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 37: Specifications

    Specifications 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 SPECIFICATIONS See "Appendices" for the following information: General Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Software Accessories Optional Equipment D086/D087...

  • Page 38: Product Overview

    Product Overview 1.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 1. Scanner HP sensor 15. Paper transfer roller 2. ADF exposure glass 16. Registration roller 3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 17. By-pass feed table 4. Exposure glass 18. Tray 2 5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 19.

  • Page 39: Paper Path

    Product Overview 1.2.2 PAPER PATH 1. Original tray 9. Tray 5: Optional LCT 1200 2. Original exit tray 10. Tray 4: Optional paper feed unit 3. Duplex inverter 11. Finisher stapler (Optional) 4. Duplex feed 12. Finisher punch (Optional) 5. By-pass tray feed 13.

  • Page 40: Drive Layout

    Product Overview 1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit. 2. Toner supply clutch-K and Turns on/off the drive power to the toner supply unit (K -CMY: and -CMY). 3.ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Moves the ITB into contact and away from the color contact motor: PCUs.
  • Page 41 Product Overview 7. Paper feed clutch Switches the drive power between tray 1 and tray 2. 8. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2). Turns on/off the drive power to the by-pass pick-up, 9. By-pass feed clutch: feed and separation rollers.

  • Page 42: Machine Configuration

    Machine Configuration 1.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION Machine Call Item Remarks Code Mainframe D086/D087 Platen cover G329 One from the two ARDF D541 500-sheet finisher D372 [16] Requires [14] 1000-sheet booklet One from [11], [12] and [16]; Requires [14] B793 [12] finisher and one from [7] and [8].
  • Page 43 Machine Configuration Machine Call Item Remarks Code 2000-sheet LCT D538-57/67 Two-tray paper feed D537-57 One from the three; unit The one-tray PFU requires [10]. One-tray paper feed D387 unit Envelope feeder D547 Requires Tray 2 of the Mainframe or [8] Caster table D446 [10]...
  • Page 44 Machine Configuration Item Machine code Call out Remark USB2.0/SD Slot D422-01 In USB A (front) Gigabit Ethernet D546-23 IEEE 1284 B679-17 Wireless LAN D377-01 (NA) You can only install one of (IEEE 802.11a/g) D377-02 (EU/AA) these at a time. Bluetooth B826-17 File Format Converter D377-04...
  • Page 45 Machine Configuration D546-06 (EU) required, merge all D546-07 (AA) applications in one SD card with SP mode. ( This card is p.2-104 "SD Card Appli PDF Direct included in [B] Move") D546-23. D403-05 (NA) In SD card slot 2 Browser Unit D403-06 (EU) Remove it from slot 2 after D403-07 (AA)

  • Page 46: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With Predecessor Products

    Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products 1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS Machine D086/D087 is a successor model to Machine D023/D025. If you have experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.

  • Page 47: Installation

    INSTALLATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 01/26/2011 Corrected Developer and Toner Bottles instructions.

  • Page 49: Installation Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2. INSTALLATION 2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more Do not let the machine get exposed to the following: 1) Cool air from an air conditioner 2) Heat from a heater...

  • Page 50: Machine Level

    Installation Requirements 2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") 2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.

  • Page 51: Machine Dimensions

    Installation Requirements 2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS [A]: 670 mm (mainframe) + 260 mm (PFU) + 120 mm (ARDF) [B]: 580 mm [C]: 670 mm [D]: 1107 mm [E]: 535 mm 2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord. Ground the machine.

  • Page 52: Optional Unit Combinations

    Optional Unit Combinations 2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS 2.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS Options Remarks Main machine (D086/D087) Platen cover One from No.2 or No.3 ARDF 1-bin tray unit Envelope feeder* Requires Tray 2 of the Mainframe or No.8 1200-sheet LCT Requires No.7 or No.8 Large capacity tray One from No.7, No.8 or No.9 Two-tray paper feed unit...
  • Page 53 Optional Unit Combinations 1000-sheet finisher One from No.11, No.12 or No.16; Requires No.14 and one from No.7 or No.8 1000-sheet booklet finisher Side tray Bridge unit One from No.13, No.14 or No.15 Shift tray 500-sheet finisher Requires No.14 *1: The Envelope Feeder EF3000 (D547) cannot be used in the one-tray paper feed unit (D387).

  • Page 54: Controller Options

    Optional Unit Combinations 2.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS Options Remarks Bluetooth IEEE 802.11a/g One from the three (I/F Slot A) IEEE 1284 File Format Converter I/F Slot B Gigabit Ethernet I/F Slot C Security SD Card (Standard) One from the five (SD card slot 1) Security SD Card (Data Overwrite PostScript 3 Security and HDD Encryption) is in SD...

  • Page 55: Other Options

    Optional Unit Combinations 2.2.3 OTHER OPTIONS Options Remarks Optional Counter Interface Unit USB2.0/SD Slot ADF Handle Type B One from No.3 or No.4 Key Counter Bracket Type H Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 2.2.4 FAX OPTIONS Options Remarks Fax Option Type C5501 G3 Interface Unit Type C5000 Memory Unit Type B Requires No.1...

  • Page 56: Copier Installation

    Copier Installation 2.3 COPIER INSTALLATION Make sure that the image transfer belt is in its correct position (away from the PCDUs) before you move the machine. Otherwise, the image transfer belt and the black PCDU can be damaged. 2.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS Rating voltage for peripherals.

  • Page 57: Installation Flow Chart

    Copier Installation 2.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation. You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher (B408 or B793) or 1200-sheet LCT (D539). The punch unit is for the booklet finisher (B793). D086/D087...

  • Page 58: Installation Procedure

    Copier Installation 2.3.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape. Put the machine on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time.

  • Page 59: Developer And Toner Bottles

    Rev. 01/26/2010 Copier Installation Developer and Toner Bottles ⇒ Open the front door [A]. Remove the stopper [B] ( x 1). This stopper locks the drum positioning plate lever. Release the image transfer unit lock lever [C], and turn the drum positioning plate lever [D] counterclockwise.

  • Page 60: Paper Trays

    Copier Installation Install each toner bottle [G] in the machine. The black toner bottle is unique for the D086/D087 models. The black toner bottle for the previous models (D023/D025) cannot be used in the D086/D087 models. The other color toner bottles are common with the previous models. 10.

  • Page 61: Emblem And Decals

    Copier Installation Emblem and Decals Attach the correct emblem [A] and the cover [B] to the front door [C] of the machine, if the emblem is not attached. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [D]. Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT.

  • Page 62: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    Copier Installation Settings Relevant to the Service Contract Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract. You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).

  • Page 63: Sp Operation Sound On/Off Setting

    Copier Installation SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting To turn off the SP Operation Sound Enter the SP mode. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear/Stop" button until you hear a beep sound. This turns off the SP operation sound. No SP operation sound can be heard in all levels [B] (SPx, SPx-xxx and SPx-xxx-xxx) of the SP mode.
  • Page 64 Copier Installation Proxy Password (SP5816-066) Get a Request Number Execute the @Remote Settings Enter the SP mode. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK] with SP5816-202. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
  • Page 65 Copier Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Succeeded Request number error Check the request number again. Already registered Check the registration status. Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. enabled) Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. disabled) Proxy error (Illegal user name or Check Proxy user name and password.
  • Page 66 Copier Installation SP5816-208 Error Codes Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround Obtain a Request Number Inquiry, registration attempted -12002 before attempting the without acquiring Request No. Inquiry or Registration. -12003 Attempted registration without Perform Confirmation before attempting the execution of a confirmation and no previous registration.
  • Page 67 Copier Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround confirmation request to the @Remote Center. -2385 Other error -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service Two registrations for the same Check the registration -2391 mainframe condition of the mainframe...

  • Page 68: Vm Card Installation

    Copier Installation VM Card Installation The App2Me application must be enabled before it can be used. The VM SD card including App2Me is provided with the main machine. Do the following procedure if a customer wants to use "App2Me". Turn off the machine if it is in use. Remove the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 69: Moving The Machine

    Copier Installation 2.3.4 MOVING THE MACHINE This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section “Transporting the Machine” if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.

  • Page 70: Paper Feed Unit Pb3080 (D387)

    Paper Feed Unit PB3080 (D387) 2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3080 (D387) 2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Securing bracket Screw (M4x10) Spring washer screw Knob screw D086/D087 2-22...

  • Page 71: Installation Procedure

    Paper Feed Unit PB3080 (D387) 2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
  • Page 72 Paper Feed Unit PB3080 (D387) Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [C]. Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. Remove tray 1 and 2 of the machine.

  • Page 73: Caster Table Type A (D446)

    Caster Table Type A (D446) 2.5 CASTER TABLE TYPE A (D446) 2.5.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty Caster Table Stud Screw 2-25 D086/D087...

  • Page 74: Installation Procedure

    Caster Table Type A (D446) 2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Put the caster table on a flat place. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine, if the copier is to be installed on the caster table. Lift the copier or one-tray paper feed unit [C], and then install it on the caster table [D]. Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.

  • Page 75: Paper Feed Unit Pb3010 (D537)

    Paper Feed Unit PB3010 (D537) 2.6 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3010 (D537) 2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Securing bracket Screw (M4x10) Spring Washer Screw 2-27 D086/D087...

  • Page 76: Installation Procedure

    Paper Feed Unit PB3010 (D537) 2.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage.
  • Page 77 Paper Feed Unit PB3010 (D537) Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine. Fasten the spring washer screw [D]. Reinstall all trays. Attach the securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each;...

  • Page 78: Envelope Feeder Ef3000 (D547)

    Envelope Feeder EF3000 (D547) 2.7 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3000 (D547) 2.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Envelope feeder Paper size decal D086/D087 2-30...

  • Page 79: Installation Procedure

    Envelope Feeder EF3000 (D547) 2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE This tray can be installed in tray 2 of the copier, or tray 3 or tray 4 of the paper feed unit (D537). There is no automatic paper size detection in the envelope feeder (D547). Adjust the paper size for the tray where the envelope feeder is to be installed with User Tools.

  • Page 80: Lcit Rt3010 (D539)

    LCIT RT3010 (D539) 2.8 LCIT RT3010 (D539) 2.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Front Bracket Rear Bracket Stud Screw Joint Pin D086/D087 2-32...

  • Page 81: Installation Procedure

    LCIT RT3010 (D539) 2.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. The Paper Tray Unit (D537) or LCT 2000-sheet (D538) must be installed before installing this 1200-sheet LCT. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes. Remove the stand covers [A].
  • Page 82 LCIT RT3010 (D539) Insert the joint pins [A]. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C] ( x 2 each). Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B]. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine. 10.

  • Page 83: Side Fence Position Change

    LCIT RT3010 (D539) 2.8.3 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE Open the right door of the LCT. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).

  • Page 84: Lcit Pb3110 (D538)

    LCIT PB3110 (D538) 2.9 LCIT PB3110 (D538) 2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Securing bracket Screw (M4x10) Spring washer screw D086/D087 2-36...

  • Page 85: Installation Procedure

    LCIT PB3110 (D538) 2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage.
  • Page 86 LCIT PB3110 (D538) Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine. Fasten the spring washer screw [D]. Reinstall all trays. Attach the securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each; M4x10). One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool (the cutout [F] is used in step 5).

  • Page 87: Ardf Df3050 (D541)

    ARDF DF3050 (D541) 2.10 ARDF DF3050 (D541) 2.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty ARDF Stamp Cartridge Knob Screw Stud Screw Attention Decal – Top Cover 2-39 D086/D087...

  • Page 88: Installation Procedure

    ARDF DF3050 (D541) 2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers. Remove the two screws already installed at the top rear of the machine. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine. Mount the ARDF [B] by aligning the screw keyholes [C] in the ARDF support plate over the stud screws.
  • Page 89 ARDF DF3050 (D541) Install the stamp cartridge [F] in the ARDF. Peel off the platen sheet [G] and place it on the exposure glass. Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet with the corner [H] on the exposure glass. 10.
  • Page 90 ARDF DF3050 (D541) 12. Attach the decal [I] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language you want. 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF operation. 14. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct.

  • Page 91: Adf Handle Type B (D366)

    ADF Handle Type B (D366) 2.11 ADF HANDLE TYPE B (D366) 2.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Handle Unit Holder Stud Bracket Securing Bracket Handle Bracket Hinge Stopper - Right Hinge Stopper - Left Spacer Bushing: M6...
  • Page 92 ADF Handle Type B (D366) D086/D087 2-44...

  • Page 93: Installation Procedure

    ADF Handle Type B (D366) 2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure. Preparing before Installing the DF Handle Open the ADF unit. Hold the securing bracket [A] at the location [B], inside the ADF cover. Secure the stud bracket [C] to the outside of the ADF cover at location [D] with two screws ( x 2: M3x8).

  • Page 94: Installing The Df Handle

    ADF Handle Type B (D366) Make two screw holes [E] in the scanner right cover with an M3x12 tapping screw from the accessories. Installing the DF Handle Attach the holder [A] to the scanner right cover (Tapping Screw - M3x12: x 2).
  • Page 95 ADF Handle Type B (D366) In the outside of the handle unit, install the bushing - M6 [C] first, and then the spacer [D]. Secure the handle unit with a screw ( x 1: M3x8). Clean the handle unit with alcohol. Then attach the stud decal [E] at the location that was cleaned.
  • Page 96 ADF Handle Type B (D366) Attach the handle bracket [F] at the front right side on the bottom of the ADF unit (Tapping Screw [Self Binding] x 2: M3x12). Close the ADF unit. Attach the hinge stoppers (left [G] and right [H]) to the left and right hinges (Tapping screw x 2: M4x8 each).
  • Page 97 ADF Handle Type B (D366) 11. Check the operation of the handle unit [J]. 2-49 D086/D087...

  • Page 98: Component Check

    1 Bin Tray BN3080 (D536) 2.12 1 BIN TRAY BN3080 (D536) 2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1 Bin Tray Unit End-fence Tray Support Bar Screws (M3 x 16) Tray D086/D087 2-50...
  • Page 99 1 Bin Tray BN3080 (D536) 2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. If the bridge unit (D386) or side tray (D542) has already been installed in the machine, remove it before installing 1 bin tray unit (D536). This will make it easier for you to do the following procedure.
  • Page 100 1 Bin Tray BN3080 (D536) Attach the tray support bar [D] to the tray [E] as shown, and then attach the end-fence [F]. Install the tray [G] (with the tray support bar) in the machine (M3 x 16: x 2). Reinstall the front right cover in the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.

  • Page 101: Internal Shift Tray Sh3040 (D388)

    Internal Shift Tray SH3040 (D388) 2.13 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040 (D388) 2.13.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Shift Tray Unit Paper Guide - Small Connector Cover 2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
  • Page 102 Internal Shift Tray SH3040 (D388) Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 1). Install the small paper guides [C]. Attach the connector cover [D] to the shift tray unit [E]. Install the shift tray unit [E] to the machine. Push down the left edge [F] of the shift tray. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
  • Page 103 Side Tray Type C5501 (D542) 2.14 SIDE TRAY TYPE C5501 (D542) 2.14.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Side Tray Unit Sub Output Tray Main Output Tray Screw Knob screw Frame Cover Holder bracket 2-55...

  • Page 104: Installation Procedure

    Side Tray Type C5501 (D542) 2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure. If you will install the 1-bin tray (D536) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the side tray (D542).
  • Page 105 Side Tray Type C5501 (D542) Attach the main output tray [A] and sub output tray [B] to the side tray unit. Install the side tray unit [A] in the machine. 2-57 D086/D087...
  • Page 106 Side Tray Type C5501 (D542) Open the side tray cover [A]. 10. Secure the side tray unit with the knob screw [B]. 11. Attach the frame cover [C]. 12. Reinstall the front right cover to the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.

  • Page 107: Bridge Unit Bu3030 (D386)

    Bridge Unit BU3030 (D386) 2.15 BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 (D386) 2.15.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Bridge Unit Frame Cover Knob screw Long knob screw Holder bracket Guide 2-59 D086/D087...

  • Page 108: Installation Procedure

    Bridge Unit BU3030 (D386) 2.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. If you will install the 1-bin tray (D536) in the machine, install the 1-bin tray before you install the bridge unit (D386). This will make it easier for you to do the following procedure.
  • Page 109 Bridge Unit BU3030 (D386) Install the bridge unit [E] in the machine. Secure the bridge unit with the knob screw [F] and screw [H]. Attach the frame cover [I]. 10. Reinstall the front right cover in the machine. Then close the right door of the machine. Open the bridge unit cover [J] when installing the front right cover.
  • Page 110 Bridge Unit BU3030 (D386) 12. Pull the extension tray [K] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (B408) is to be installed in the main machine. 13. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 14. Check the bridge unit operation. D086/D087 2-62...

  • Page 111: Finisher Sr3050 (D372)

    Finisher SR3050 (D372) 2.16 FINISHER SR3050 (D372) 2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Unit Holder Shift Tray Holder Bracket Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 6 Screw: M4 x 14 Screw: M4 x 20 Support Bracket Support Bracket Cover...

  • Page 112: Installation Procedure

    Finisher SR3050 (D372) 2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. Before you install the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (D386) must be installed. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes. Install the unit holder [A] ( x 3 - M4 x 14).
  • Page 113 Finisher SR3050 (D372) Install the 500-sheet finisher [A]. Install the holder bracket [B] ( x 1; M3 x 6). Connect the finisher cable [C]. Install the shift tray [A] ( x 2 - M3 x 8). Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation. 2-65 D086/D087...

  • Page 114: Sr790 (B408)

    SR790 (B408) 2.17 SR790 (B408) 2.17.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Front Joint Bracket Rear Joint Bracket (Not used) Rear Joint Bracket Grounding Plate Copy Tray Staple Position Decal Screw - M4 x 14 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 Screw - M3 x 8...

  • Page 115: Nstallation Procedure

    SR790 (B408) 2.17.2 NSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If this finisher will be installed on the D086 or D087 copier, the following options must be installed before installing this finisher. - Bridge Unit (D386) - Paper Feed Unit (D537) or LCT (D538) Unpack the finisher, and then remove the stopper [A] and tapes ( x 1).
  • Page 116 SR790 (B408) Install the grounding plate [E] on the finisher ( x 2 - M3 x 8). Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box. Open the front door [F] of the finisher, and then pull the locking lever [G] (1 knob screw - M3 x 8).

  • Page 117: Booklet Finisher Sr3000 (B793)

    Booklet Finisher SR3000 (B793) 2.18 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3000 (B793) 2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Rear Joint Bracket Front Joint Bracket Grounding Plate Upper Output Tray Cushion Lower Output Tray Short Knob Screw Long Knob Screw Screw (M3 x 8)

  • Page 118: Installation Procedure

    Booklet Finisher SR3000 (B793) 2.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. The bridge unit (D386) and optional paper feed unit (D537 or D538) must be installed before installing this finisher (B793). Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher. D086/D087 2-70...
  • Page 119 Booklet Finisher SR3000 (B793) Open the front door [A] of the 1000-sheet booklet finisher, and then pull out the jogger unit [B]. Remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher. Attach the cushions [C] to the finisher. Make sure that the cushions are placed within 0 to 1 mm [D] from the edge of the cover or frame.
  • Page 120 Booklet Finisher SR3000 (B793) Attach the rear joint bracket [F] ( x 2, M4 x 14). Attach the front joint bracket [G] and the holder bracket [H] ( x 2; M4 x 14). The holder bracket [H] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [G]. The holder bracket is provided with the bridge unit (D386).
  • Page 121 Booklet Finisher SR3000 (B793) 13. Install the upper output tray [M] (Short knob screw x 1). 14. Install the lower output tray [N]. 15. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 16. Check the 1000-sheet booklet finisher operation. 2-73 D086/D087...

  • Page 122: Punch Kit Pu3000 (B807)

    Punch Kit PU3000 (B807) 2.19 PUNCH KIT PU3000 (B807) 2.19.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Punch Unit Punch Drive Motor Hopper Full Sensor Arm Sub-scan Registration Sensor Unit Punch Unit Stay Sub-scan Registration Sensor Guide Hopper Screw...

  • Page 123: Installation

    Punch Kit PU3000 (B807) 2.19.2 INSTALLATION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the 1000-sheet booklet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it. Open the top cover [A] and then release the guide arm [B] ( x 1).
  • Page 124 Punch Kit PU3000 (B807) Timing belt cover [F]. Rear cover of the 1000-sheet booklet finisher [G] ( x 2). Cover bracket [H] ( x 1) Remove the paper guide plate [I] from the rear side ( x 4). Install the punch unit stay [J] from the front side ( x 3).
  • Page 125 Punch Kit PU3000 (B807) 10. Install the sub-scan registration sensor guide [K] from the top ( x 1). 11. Remove the bracket [L] from the punch unit ( x 1). 12. Install the punch unit [M] along the punch unit stay from the rear side. 13.
  • Page 126 Punch Kit PU3000 (B807) 16. Install the punch drive motor [S] on the rear frame ( x 2). 17. Connect the drive motor harness [T] to the harness from the punch unit ( x 1). 18. Connect the home position sensor harness from the punch unit to the home position sensor [U].
  • Page 127 Punch Kit PU3000 (B807) 21. Install the hopper full sensor arm [W] ( x 1, spring x 1). 22. Connect the harness from the sub-scan registration sensor unit to the hopper full sensor [X]. 23. Install the hopper [Y] from the front side. 24.

  • Page 128: Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)

    Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) 2.20 KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE H (A674) 2.20.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C]. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
  • Page 129 Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) Connect the harness to the connector [F] inside the machine. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover [G]. Reassemble the machine. 2-81 D086/D087...

  • Page 130: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) 2.21 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) 2.21.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rear cover ( p.4-19) IOB bracket ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Install the four stud stays in the location [A] in the controller box. Install the key counter interface board on the four stud stays in the controller box.
  • Page 131 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) Cut off the part [C] of the rear cover. Clamp the harness from the counter device with the clamp [D] and put it as shown by the blue arrow ( x 1). Route the harness from the counter device in the same way as the other harnesses [E] x 3).

  • Page 132: Usb2.0/Sd Slot Type F (D546)

    USB2.0/SD Slot Type F (D546) 2.22 USB2.0/SD SLOT TYPE F (D546) 2.22.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty USB2.0/SD Slot Ground Plate USB Cable Screw: M3 x 6 blue Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 6 Bracket PDF Direct Card*...

  • Page 133: Installation Procedure

    USB2.0/SD Slot Type F (D546) 2.22.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Connect the USB cable [B] to the USB slot [A] in the USB2.0/SD Slot as shown above. Attach the ground plate [C] to the bracket of the USB2.0/SD Slot ( x 1: M3x6 blue). Rear cover of the machine ( x 8) Remove the scanner left cover [A] (...
  • Page 134 USB2.0/SD Slot Type F (D546) Remove the part [A] on the scanner left cover. Make four holes in the scanner left cover with a screwdriver as shown [A]. Smooth the four holes in the scanner left cover as shown [B]. 10.
  • Page 135 USB2.0/SD Slot Type F (D546) 12. Attach the bracket [A] with its two hooks [B] as shown above ( x 1: M3x6). 13. Put the USB cable [A] through the cutout [B] of the left frame cover. 14. Attach the scanner left cover [C] to the mainframe, and then connect the USB cable [A] to USB-A (front side) as shown above.

  • Page 136: Testing The Sd Card/Usb Slot

    USB2.0/SD Slot Type F (D546) from the SD card in slot 2 to the SD card in slot 1 with SP5-873-001 "Move Exec". 21. Enter the Scanner SP mode, and then change the setting of SP1013-001 from “0” to “1”. 22.

  • Page 137: Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)

    Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547) 2.23 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C5501 (D547) 2.23.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 14 Screw: M3 x 25* Tapping Screw: M3 x 10 Upper Tray Lower Tray...

  • Page 138: Installation Procedure

    Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547) 2.23.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1: M3x14). For this model, use the screw holes marked "2" on the table bracket. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( x 2: M3x8).

  • Page 139: Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)

    Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) 2.24 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER) This option is provided as a service part. 2.24.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rear cover ( p.4-19 in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section) Open the ARDF or platen cover. Glass cover [A] ( x 4) ARDF exposure glass [B] Rear scale [C] ( x 3)
  • Page 140 Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [E]. Install the heater [F] in the scanner unit ( x 1, hook) Put the connector [G] through the cutout. 10. Connect it to the connector [H] (blue and red cords) in the frame of the machine. 11.

  • Page 141: Anti-Condensation Heater Type A

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 2.25 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER TYPE A This option is provided as a service part. 2.25.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty Tray heater On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91) Harness 2 (For D387) Harness 1 (For D537/D538) Screw M4 x 10 Installation procedure 2-93 D086/D087...

  • Page 142: Installation Procedure

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 2.25.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses. Check that all harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation. For installing the tray heater in the main machine Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

  • Page 143: For Installing The Tray Heater In D537

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A For installing the tray heater in D537 Rear cover [A] ( x 8) Pull out the two trays in the optional paper feed unit. Install the tray heater [B] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
  • Page 144 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Remove the two securing brackets [C] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [D] of the optional paper feed unit ( x 2). Remove the harness cover bracket [E] ( x 1). Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. Replace the shoulder screw [F] with the washer screw [G], using securing bracket [H] ( x 1).

  • Page 145: For Installing The Tray Heater In D538

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Connect the harness [I] to the connector [J] of the tray heater. Route the harness [I] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4). 10. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [K] of the mainframe. 11.
  • Page 146 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Remove the right tray [B] while pressing down the stopper [C]. When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in, making sure to keep the tray level. Install the tray heater [D] in the optional LCT ( x 1).
  • Page 147 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. Replace the shoulder screw [H] with the washer screw [I], using the securing bracket [J] x 1). 10. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [L] of the tray heater. 11.

  • Page 148: For Installing The Tray Heater In D387

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A For Installing the Tray Heater in D387 Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( step 1 in For Installing the Tray Heater in D537). Pull out the tray in the optional paper tray. Install the tray heater [A] in the optional paper tray ( x 1).
  • Page 149 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. Replace the shoulder screw [E] with the washer screw [F], using securing bracket [G] ( x 1). Connect the harness [H] to the connector [I] of the tray heater. Route the harness [H] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
  • Page 150 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Attach the on/standby decal [O] to the right-hand side of the main power switch. D086/D087 2-102...

  • Page 151: Controller Options

    Controller Options 2.26 CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2.26.1 OVERVIEW This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). I/F Card Slots Slot A is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed): IEEE1284, IEEE802.11a/g (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth or Remote Communication Gate.

  • Page 152: Sd Card Appli Move

    Controller Options 2.26.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE Overview The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from one SD card to another SD card. If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with SP5873-1 (PostScript 3, Security Application, PictBridge, IPDS unit, PDF Direct, etc.).

  • Page 153: Move Exec

    Controller Options Move Exec The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card to another SD card. Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.

  • Page 154: Postscript3 Unit Type C5501

    Controller Options Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. Turn the main switch off. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2. 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. 12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this section).
  • Page 155 Controller Options Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door. Plug in, and then turn on the machine. Move security applications from the SD card in SD slot 2 to the SD card in SD slot 1 with SP5-873-001.

  • Page 156: Ipds Unit Type C5501

    Controller Options 2.26.4 IPDS UNIT TYPE C5501 Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). Move the SD card (security applications) [B] from slot 1 to slot 2. If the VM card is already in slot 2, first remove the VM card in SD slot 2.

  • Page 157: File Format Converter Type E

    Controller Options 2.26.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the slot B cover [A] ( x 2). Install the file format converter [B] into slot B and then fasten it with screws. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.

  • Page 158: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type A

    Controller Options 2.26.6 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). Remove the slot A cover [A] ( x 2).

  • Page 159: Ieee 802.11A/G Interface Unit Type J

    Controller Options 2.26.7 IEEE 802.11A/G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot ( x 2).
  • Page 160 Controller Options "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not attach them at the wrong places. Attach the clamps as shown above. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 7). Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.

  • Page 161: Up Mode Settings For Wireless Lan

    Controller Options UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on. You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet. Press the "User Tools/Counter"...

  • Page 162: Sp Mode And Up Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11 A/G Wireless Lan

    Controller Options 1 Mbps: 400 m (437 yd.) 10. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings. Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings: Transmission mode Channel Transmission Speed SSID WEP Key SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g Wireless LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g.

  • Page 163: Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245

    Controller Options 2.26.8 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 3245 Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).

  • Page 164: Camera Direct Print Card Type I

    Controller Options 2.26.9 CAMERA DIRECT PRINT CARD TYPE I Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). Move the SD card (security applications) [B] from SD slot 1 to SD slot 2. If the VM SD card is already in SD slot 2, first remove the VM card in SD slot 2.

  • Page 165: Browser Unit Type E

    Controller Options 2.26.10 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). Remove the VM card [B] from SD slot 2. Turn the SD-card label face [C] of the browser unit to the front of the machine.
  • Page 166 Controller Options 15. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen. 16. Touch "Change Allocation". 17. Touch the "Browser" line. 18. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Browser Unit. In default, this function is assigned to the "Other Functions"...

  • Page 167: Gigabit Ethernet Type B

    Controller Options 2.26.11 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 3). Pull out the controller board [B] ( x 5). Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 168: Check All Connections

    Controller Options Attach the Gigabit Ethernet controller [A] into the slot [B] ( x 2). Reassemble the machine. Check the operation of the Gigabit Ethernet 2.26.12 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch. Enter the printer user mode.

  • Page 169: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 171: Maintenance Tables

    Maintenance Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: Preventive Maintenance Items Other Yield Parts D086/D087...

  • Page 172: Pm Parts Settings

    PM Parts Settings 3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS 3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS Enter the SP mode. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically.

  • Page 173: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    PM Parts Settings 3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS Turn on the main power switch. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-803. If the PM counter for a unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-804.

  • Page 175: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 177: Beforehand

    Beforehand 4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4.1 BEFOREHAND Before installing options, please do the following: If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.

  • Page 178: Special Tools

    Special Tools 4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS Part Number Description Q'ty B645 5010 SD Card B645 6705 PCMCIA Card Adapter B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 NOTE G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel * C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta –...

  • Page 179: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 4.3.1 SCANNING Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments. Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification A: Sub-scan magnification Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.

  • Page 180: Scanner Leading Edge And Side-To-Side Registration

    Image Adjustment Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.

  • Page 181: Ardf

    Image Adjustment 4.3.2 ARDF ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge A: Leading edge registration Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.

  • Page 182: Ardf Sub-Scan Magnification

    Image Adjustment ARDF sub-scan magnification Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary. Standard: ±5.0% Reduction mode: ±1.0% Enlargement mode: ±1.0% 4.3.3 REGISTRATION Image Area A = C = 5.2 mm (0.2"), B = 2.0 mm...

  • Page 183: Paper Registration Standard

    Image Adjustment Paper Registration Standard The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the following tolerance. Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 9 mm Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm Adjustment Procedure Enter SP2-109-003. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003. Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page.

  • Page 184: Erase Margin Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot be adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B. Enter SP2-109-003.

  • Page 185: Color Registration

    Image Adjustment 4.3.5 COLOR REGISTRATION Line Position Adjustment The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints. Do the following if color registration shifts: Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment. First do SP2-111-3.

  • Page 186: Printer Gamma Correction

    Image Adjustment 4.3.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output. You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements. Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust the gamma data for the following: Highlight Middle...
  • Page 187 Image Adjustment - Adjustment Procedure - Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust. Enter the SP mode. Select "System SP." Select SP4-918-009. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table below).
  • Page 188 Image Adjustment Adjust the offset value so Shadow (High ID) that the density of level 8 (K, C, M, and Y) matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does Highlight (Low ID) not show on the copy and (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 3 is...
  • Page 189 Image Adjustment - Photo Mode, Single Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 ID max: (K) matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so Middle (Middle ID) that the density of level 6...
  • Page 190 Image Adjustment - Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so ID max: (K, C, M, that the density of level 10 and Y) matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
  • Page 191 Image Adjustment - Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 ID max: (K) matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

  • Page 192: Printer Mode

    Image Adjustment Printer Mode There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001): 1200 x 1200 photo mode 1200 x 1200 text mode 2400 x 600 photo mode 2400 x 600 text mode 1800 x 600 photo mode 1800 x 600 text mode 600 x 600 photo mode 600 x 600 text mode...

  • Page 193: Exterior Covers

    Exterior Covers 4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS 4.4.1 FRONT DOOR Open the front door [A]. Remove the two pins [B], and then remove the front cover. 4-17 D086/D087...

  • Page 194: Controller Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.2 CONTROLLER COVER Controller cover [A] ( x 3) 4.4.3 LEFT COVER Controller cover ( p.4-18) Left cover [A] ( x 6) D086/D087 4-18...

  • Page 195: Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.4 REAR COVER Rear cover [A] ( x 8) 4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner right cover ( p.4-22 "Ozone Filter and Dust Filter") Right top cover ( p.4-22 "Ozone Filter and Dust Filter") Open the right door [A]. Right rear cover [B] ( x 3) 4-19...

  • Page 196: Operation Panel

    Exterior Covers 4.4.6 OPERATION PANEL Top left front cover [A] ( x 2) Open the right door. Front right cover [B] ( x 1) Clip table cover [C] ( x 1) Top front cover [D] ( x 3) Operation panel [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 197: Paper Exit Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.7 PAPER EXIT COVER Front right cover ( p.4-20 "Operation Panel") Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1) 4.4.8 INNER TRAY Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-63) Paper exit cover ( p.4-21) Left cover ( p.4-18) Toner cartridge cover [A] ( x 2) Inner tray [B] 4-21...

  • Page 198: Ozone Filter And Dust Filter

    Exterior Covers 4.4.9 OZONE FILTER AND DUST FILTER Ozone filters for the scanner unit Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) Loosen the top-right screw of the rear cover. Right top cover [B] ( x 1) Ozone filters [A] in the right top cover. D086/D087 4-22...

  • Page 199: Ozone Filter And Dust Filter For The Ih Inverter

    Exterior Covers Ozone filter and dust filter for the IH inverter IH inverter fan cover [A] (hook) Dust filter [A] Ozone filter [B] 4-23 D086/D087...

  • Page 200: Scanner Unit

    Scanner Unit 4.5 SCANNER UNIT 4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS Glass cover [A] ( x 4) ARDF exposure glass [B] Rear scale [C] ( x 3) Exposure glass with left scale [D] Position the white marker [E] at the rear-left corner and the black or blue marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass.

  • Page 201: Original Length Sensors

    Scanner Unit 4.5.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS Exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-24) Original length sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2) Original length sensors [A] (hooks) 4-25 D086/D087...

  • Page 202: Exposure Lamp

    Scanner Unit 4.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP Rear cover ( p.4-19) Operation panel ( p.4-20) Exposure glass ( p.4-24) Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1) Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2) Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2) Disconnect the connector [A] from the lamp stabilizer [B]. SIO [C] ( x 4, x All)

  • Page 203: Reassembling

    Scanner Unit 10. Release the clamp [A] ( x 1). 11. Remove the pulley [B]. 12. Hold down the snap [C], and then slide the exposure lamp [D] to the front side. 13. Exposure lamp [D] Reassembling Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide the clamp [A] to adjust the cable slack. 4-27 D086/D087...

  • Page 204: Scanner Motor

    Scanner Unit 4.5.4 SCANNER MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner motor assembly [A] ( x 2, spring x 1) Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, x 1,) D086/D087 4-28...

  • Page 205: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    Scanner Unit 4.5.5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) Exposure glass ( p.4-24) Original length sensor bracket ( p.4-25 "Original Length Sensors") SBU cover bracket [A] ( x 9) Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, Grand screw x 1, x 2, x 2) When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:...

  • Page 206: Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

    Scanner Unit 4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER Rear cover ( p.4-19) Exposure lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2, x 2) 4.5.7 SIO (SCANNER IN/OUT) BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-19) SIO [A] ( x 4, x All) D086/D087 4-30...

  • Page 207: Scanner Hp Sensor

    Scanner Unit 4.5.8 SCANNER HP SENSOR Scanner left cover and scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Exposure glass ( p.4-24) Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side. Remove the mylar [A] Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, three snaps) 4-31 D086/D087...

  • Page 208: Platen Cover Sensor

    Scanner Unit 4.5.9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR Scanner left cover and scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 " D086/D087 4-32...
  • Page 209 Scanner Unit Exposure Lamp") Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4-33 D086/D087...

  • Page 210: Front Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit 4.5.10 FRONT SCANNER WIRE Exposure glass ( p.4-24) Scanner left stay [A] ( x 3) Front frame [B] ( x 5) Front scanner wire clamp [A] Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1) Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1) D086/D087 4-34...

  • Page 211: Reinstalling The Front Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) [C] through the notch. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times.
  • Page 212 Scanner Unit Insert the left end into the slit [B]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [C] and the rear track of the movable pulley [D]. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [A]. The end should go via the front track of the right pulley [B] and the front track of the movable pulley [C].

  • Page 213: Rear Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit 11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H]. 12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I]. 13. Pull out the positioning pins. Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not. 4.5.11 REAR SCANNER WIRE Exposure glass ( p.4-24)

  • Page 214: Reinstalling The Rear Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit Front Scanner Wire") Scanner rear frame [A] ( x 9, ground screw x 2, x All) Follow the steps 3 through 5 in the “Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire” Section. You can remove the rear scanner wire with the same manner for replacing the front scanner wire.
  • Page 215 Scanner Unit The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a mirror image. Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the front of the machine.

  • Page 216: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    Scanner Unit 4.5.12 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times: When you replace the operation panel. When you replace the controller board. When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu.

  • Page 217: Laser Optics

    Laser Optics 4.6 LASER OPTICS Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. 4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION Caution decals are placed as shown below. Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit.

  • Page 218: Ld Safety Switch

    Laser Optics 4.6.2 LD SAFETY SWITCH A relay on the PSU ensures technician and user safety. It also prevents the laser beam from turning on during servicing. This relay turns off when the front cover, upper left cover, or right door is opened.

  • Page 219: Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics 4.6.3 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit. A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).

  • Page 220: Before Removing The Old Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics Before removing the old laser optics housing unit Do the following settings before removing the laser optics housing unit. These are adjustments for skew adjustment motors in the laser optics housing unit. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. Enter the SP mode.

  • Page 221: Removing The Old Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics Removing the old laser optics housing unit Controller cover [A] ( x 3) Left cover [B] ( x 6) Airflow fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 2) Remove the old laser optics housing unit [A] ( x 2, All x 3) 4-45...

  • Page 222: Installing A New Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).

  • Page 223: After Installing The New Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics After installing the new laser optics housing unit Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser optics housing unit. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. Adjust the main scan magnification for K, M, C, Y. Input the standard values [C] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main scan magnification adjustment with SP2-102-013, 014, 015, 016.
  • Page 224 Laser Optics The value [B] is different for each laser optics housing unit. Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003). Check that the left trim margin is within 2 ± 1 mm. If not, change the registration value for the main scan registration adjustment.

  • Page 225: Polygon Mirror Motor And Drive Board

    Laser Optics 4.6.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD Laser optics housing unit [A] ( p.4-41) Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4) Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 2) Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) After installing the polygon mirror motor:...

  • Page 226: Airflow Fans

    Laser Optics To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12. After you replace the motor, do the adjustments in the following section of the manual: Image Adjustment –...

  • Page 227: Image Creation

    Image Creation 4.7 IMAGE CREATION 4.7.1 PCDU Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve. Open the front door. Lever lock [A] ( x 1) Turn the drum positioning plate lever [B] and the image transfer unit lock lever [C] counter-clockwise.

  • Page 228: Drum Unit And Development Unit

    Image Creation 4.7.2 DRUM UNIT AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT The new drum unit has a front cover and a front joint. When you attach the new drum unit to the development unit, remove a front cover and a front joint at first. And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit.
  • Page 229 Image Creation Remove the bushing [A] of the development roller at the rear of the PCDU ( x 1). Do not put too much weight on the PCDU. Otherwise, the plastic frame [B] of the development unit may be damaged. Remove the front joint [A] ( x 2, x 1).
  • Page 230 Image Creation Rotate the development roller [A] five or six times in the counterclockwise direction. This step removes developer that has stuck to the development roller, which would cause color unevenness. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure. 10.

  • Page 231: Developer

    Image Creation Developer Set SP 3902-xxx to "1". Black: 3902-005 Yellow: 3902-006 Cyan: 3902-007 Magenta: 3902-008 Turn the machine power off. Development unit ( p.4-50) Hopper cover [A] (4 hooks) Release the three hooks first in the correct order (from Put the head of a screwdriver in the groove gap [B] as shown, and then release the hook Follow the correct order...

  • Page 232: Toner Collection Bottle

    Image Creation Keep the developer off at both ends of the development unit enclosed in red lines in the diagram. Turn the machine power on. The machine initializes the developer and resets the PM counter for the developer. (For details of the developer initialization result, see "Developer Initialization Result"...

  • Page 233: Second Duct Fan

    Image Creation 4.7.4 SECOND DUCT FAN Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Second duct [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 2) Split the second duct (4 hooks). Second duct fan [A] 4-57 D086/D087...

  • Page 234: When Reinstalling The Second Duct Fan

    Image Creation When reinstalling the second duct fan Make sure that the second duct fan is installed with its decal facing to the front of the machine. 4.7.5 THIRD DUCT FAN Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Third duct [A] (...

  • Page 235: Toner Pump Unit

    Image Creation 4.7.6 TONER PUMP UNIT There are four pump units inside the machine. This procedure describes the replacement procedure only for one unit. If you need to replace another unit, do the same as this procedure. Put some sheets of paper on the floor before doing this procedure. Toner may fall on the floor.
  • Page 236 Image Creation Remove the toner pump unit [A] ( x 2) Make sure that a sheet of paper is attached to the frame of the rear side. The picture on the left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set, but the picture on the right shows a sheet of paper that is not correctly set.
  • Page 237 Image Creation If not, the toner may scatter away and fall down. 10. Put the toner pump unit on the sheet of paper, which has been put in step 4, with its opening [A] up. 11. Keep the opening [A] of the toner supply tube up, and then clip the opening of the toner supply.

  • Page 238: When You Install The New Toner Pump Unit

    Image Creation When you install the new toner pump unit Before installing the new toner pump unit, mask the opening of the old toner pump unit with tape. Dispose of it following local rules. Put a sheet of paper (A3/DLT) inside the machine. Turn up the opening of the toner supply tube, and then remove the object that was used to clip the opening of the toner supply tube.
  • Page 239 Image Creation On the above picture, the magnified picture of the connector shows the easiest way to connect it. Clamp the harness [A] ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K). Avoid touching these spring terminals [B]. Pass the harness of the toner pump unit behind the hook [A], while pressing at [B]. Secure the toner supply tube with the holder [C], lifting up the edge of the holder "very gently".

  • Page 240: Toner End Sensor

    Image Creation 4.7.7 TONER END SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Toner end sensor [A] ( x 1, 2 hooks each) A toner end sensor is not installed in the entrance of the toner supply tube for black. D086/D087 4-64...

  • Page 241: Image Transfer

    Image Transfer 4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER 4.8.1 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT Open the right door. Open the front door. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.4-49 "PCDU") Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever [A] counterclockwise. Pull out the image transfer belt unit [B] halfway. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the image transfer belt unit fully.

  • Page 242: Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit

    Image Transfer 4.8.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT If you will install a new belt cleaning unit, then set SP 3902-015 to 1. If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Do not use SP3902-015 or 013 if you replace the complete ITB unit.

  • Page 243: Image Transfer Belt

    Image Transfer 4.8.3 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.4-64) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-63) Turn the image transfer unit contact lever [A] counterclockwise (as seen from the rear). Gear [B] (hook x 1) Turn the gear cover [C] clockwise (as seen from the rear) ( x 1).
  • Page 244 Image Transfer Remove the two screws and then the rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear). Remove the two screws and then the front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front). 10. Put the front side of the image transfer belt unit on a corner of the table or a box as shown.
  • Page 245 Image Transfer 11. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown. 12. Image transfer belt [A] 4-69 D086/D087...

  • Page 246: When Reinstalling The Image Transfer Belt

    Image Transfer When reinstalling the image transfer belt Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt. There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example) in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
  • Page 247 Image Transfer Put "Lubricant Powder" (B132 9700) on the surface of the image transfer belt [A], while you turn the drive gear [B] at a constant speed, as shown. (The straight arrow in the picture shows belt movement direction.) Lubricant powder prevents the image transfer cleaning blade from turning up.

  • Page 248: Paper Transfer

    Paper Transfer 4.9 PAPER TRANSFER 4.9.1 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP 3902-016 to 1. If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.

  • Page 249: Paper Transfer Unit

    Paper Transfer 4.9.2 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP3-902-016 to 1. If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Turn off the main power switch.
  • Page 250 Paper Transfer Pivot bracket [A] ( x 1) Paper transfer unit [B] ( x 1, 2 springs) D086/D087 4-74...

  • Page 251: Id Sensor Board

    Paper Transfer 4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD K PCDU ( p.4-49) Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-63) ID sensor unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1) ID sensor cover [A] ( x 4) ID sensor board [B] ( x 2)

  • Page 252: Cleaning For Id Sensors

    Paper Transfer Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require a cleaning procedure every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning. K PCDU ( p.4-49) Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-63) Slide the ID sensor shutter [A] to the left side. Clean the ID sensors keeping the ID sensor shutter to the left.

  • Page 253: After Installing A New Id Sensor Unit/Board

    Paper Transfer After installing a new ID sensor unit/board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit/board. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. Enter the SP mode. Input two correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with SP3-362-013 and SP3-362-016 on the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit/board.

  • Page 254: Drive Unit

    Drive Unit 4.10 DRIVE UNIT The drawing above shows the drive unit layout. 1. Fusing/paper exit motor 7. Paper feed clutch – Tray 2 2. Development clutches 8. Paper feed motor 3. Image transfer belt contact motor 9. Registration motor 4.

  • Page 255: Gear Unit

    Drive Unit 4.10.1 GEAR UNIT All PCU's Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-63) Rear cover ( p.4-19) Controller box ( p.4-153) Toner sump cover [A] (hooks) Third duct ( p.4-56) Left cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Remove the rear stay [A] ( x 3).
  • Page 256 Drive Unit 10. Remove ten clamps (blue arrows). 11. Release seven clamps and turn each harness aside. 12. Disconnect four connectors (red arrows). 13. Disconnect two connectors (red arrows) and put these harnesses inside the machine. D086/D087 4-80...
  • Page 257 Drive Unit 14. Disconnect each connector (red circles) from the drum/development drive motors ( x 1 each). 15. Disconnect each connector (blue circles) from the development clutches ( x 1 each). 16. Cover [A] ( x 2) 17. Disconnect eight connectors from the high voltage supply board ( x 8, x 2).
  • Page 258 Drive Unit 18. Release four clamps (red circles) and turn the harnesses aside. 19. Disconnect five connectors (red circles) ( x 5). 20. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3) 21. Pulley [A] (timing belt) D086/D087 4-82...

  • Page 259: When Installing The Drive Unit

    Drive Unit 22. Gear unit [A] ( x 8) When installing the drive unit Make sure that the bushing [A] is fully set in the frame of the gear unit before installing the timing belt and pulley to the shaft [B]. 4-83 D086/D087...

  • Page 260: Adjustment After Replacing The Gear Unit

    Drive Unit Adjustment after replacing the gear unit Do the following procedures after replacing the gear unit. Turn on the main power switch. Enter "System SP" in the SP mode. Do “Amplitude Control" with SP1-902-001. Check the result of the Amplitude Control with SP1-902-002. 0: Success, 2: Failure due to no sampling data, 3: Failure due to insufficient number of pattern detections When the result of this adjustment is "2"...

  • Page 261: Paper Feed Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Release the two clamps ( x 2) Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2, timing belt) 4-85 D086/D087...

  • Page 262: Drum/Development Motors For M, C, And Y

    Drive Unit 4.10.4 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTORS FOR M, C, AND Y Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Drum/Development motors (three motors, one each for MCY) [A] ( x 4, x 1 each) 4.10.5 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR-K Rear cover ( p.4-19)

  • Page 263: Itb Drive Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") ITB drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) 4.10.7 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) 4-87...

  • Page 264: Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.8 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 2) 4.10.9 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR Open the right door. Right door cover ( p.4-136 "By-pass Bottom Tray") Duplex door [A] (2 hooks) Duplex guide plate [B] (...
  • Page 265 Drive Unit Duplex inverter motor bracket cover [A] ( x 2, x 2) Duplex inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1) Gear [A] ( x 1, belt x 1) Duplex inverter motor [B] ( x 4) 4-89 D086/D087...

  • Page 266: Pressure Roller Contact Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.10 PRESSURE ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1). Pressure roller contact motor [A] ( x 4) D086/D087 4-90...

  • Page 267: Duplex/By-Pass Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.11 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Pressure roller contact motor ( p.4-88) Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1, x 1) Duplex/by-pass motor bracket [A] ( x 2) 4-91 D086/D087...

  • Page 268: Paper Transfer Contact Motor

    Drive Unit Duplex/by-pass motor [A] ( x 4, belt x 1) 4.10.12 PAPER TRANSFER CONTACT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Stay [A] ( x 4) Pressure roller contact motor ( p.4-88) Duplex/by-pass motor bracket ( p.4-89)
  • Page 269 Drive Unit Paper transfer contact motor [A] ( x 2) NOTE: The picture below shows how to use the screwdriver to remove the screws of the paper transfer contact motor. 4-93 D086/D087...

  • Page 270: Toner Transport Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.13 TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) D086/D087 4-94...

  • Page 271: Toner Collection Unit

    Drive Unit 4.10.14 TONER COLLECTION UNIT Gear Unit ( p.4-77) Toner collection unit [A] ( x 6, x 1) 4-95 D086/D087...

  • Page 272: Paper Feed Clutches

    Drive Unit 4.10.15 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Release five clamps, and then turn the harness [A] aside. Paper feed clutch 1 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, x 1) Paper feed clutch 1 [A] D086/D087 4-96...
  • Page 273 Drive Unit Paper feed clutch 2 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) Paper feed clutch 2 [A] 4-97 D086/D087...

  • Page 274: Development Clutch-Y

    Drive Unit 4.10.16 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-Y Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Open the controller box. ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Drum/development motor-Y ( p.4-84) Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1). Remove the pulley and bushing [A]. Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1).

  • Page 275: Development Clutches For M And C

    Drive Unit Development clutch-Y [B] ( x 1) 4.10.17 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES FOR M AND C Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Open the controller box. ( p.4-153 "Controller Box"). Drum/development motors for M and C ( p.4-84) Disconnect the connector for each development clutch ( x 1).

  • Page 276: Development Clutch-K

    Drive Unit 4.10.18 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-K Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") Drum/development motor-K ( p.4-84) Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1). Development clutch-K [A] ( x 1) D086/D087 4-100...

  • Page 277: Fusing

    Fusing 4.11 FUSING 4.11.1 FUSING UNIT MAINTENANCE PARTS In the fusing unit, there are some maintenance parts. However, these parts are defined as EM parts. Refer to the following list to check the maintenance parts. Maintenance Parts Replacement Procedure Heating Roller p.4-103 -Bearing p.4-103...
  • Page 278 Fusing Front fusing stopper [A] ( x 1) Rear fusing stopper [B] ( x 1) Release the lock levers [A]. Hold the fusing unit handles [B], and then pull out the fusing unit. D086/D087 4-102...

  • Page 279: Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

    Fusing 4.11.3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Fusing entrance guide plate [A] ( x 2) Cleaning Requirement The fusing entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the fusing entrance guide plate at the place shown above with a dry cloth, and then clean the fusing entrance guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol.

  • Page 280: Fusing Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure

    Fusing 4.11.4 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE The fusing exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Open the exit guide plate [A]. Clean the exit guide plate with a dry cloth, and then clean the exit guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the points shown above.

  • Page 281: Heating Roller And Heating Roller Bearing

    Fusing 4.11.5 HEATING ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER BEARING Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Open the jam removal door [A]. Front fusing cover [B] ( x 2; Stepped screws) Rear fusing cover [C] ( x 2; Stepped screws) Fusing right cover [A] ( x 2;...
  • Page 282 Fusing Pressure roller contact shaft actuator [A] and pressure roller contact shaft gear [B] ( x 1) Turn both pressure levers [A] [B], and pull out pins [C] [D]. If the pins [C] [D] are not pulled out in this step, the fusing unit frames may become bent.
  • Page 283 Fusing 10. Top stay [A] ( x 4) 11. Heating roller bearing [A] at the front side (C-ring x 1) 12. Fusing drive gear [A] 13. Heating roller gear [A] (C-ring x 1) 4-107 D086/D087...
  • Page 284 Fusing 14. Heating roller bearing [A] at the rear side 15. Keep the heating roller stripper plate [A] open, and then remove the heating roller [B]. 16. Heating roller [A] The surface of the heating roller is fragile, so the heating roller must be covered with a sheet of paper when it is placed on a table or floor.

  • Page 285: When Re-Installing The Heating Roller

    Fusing When re-installing the heating roller Apply three spots of "Barrierta S552R" (the diameter of each spot must be about 3 mm in diameter, and approximately 0.1 g in weight) to the front shaft of the heating roller at 2 - 3 mm from the notch [A].

  • Page 286: Fusing Cleaning Felt

    Fusing Heating Roller Stripper Plate Installation The heating roller stripper plate may come off the fusing unit frame after removing the heating roller. When reinstalling the heating roller stripper plate: Set the heating roller stripper plate [A] on the fusing frame first. Attach the springs [B] (front and rear) correctly as shown above.

  • Page 287: When Attaching A New Fusing Cleaning Felt

    Fusing When attaching a new fusing cleaning felt Attach the fusing cleaning felt [A], aligning both edges of the fusing cleaning felt with the red lines on the bottom cover. Make sure that the fusing cleaning felt is correctly attached to the frame. Otherwise, dust from the IH coil unit may fall on the paper in the fusing unit and the output becomes dirty.

  • Page 288: Fusing Lamp

    Fusing 4.11.7 FUSING LAMP Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Front bracket ( p.4-103) Rear bracket ( p.4-103) Front terminal of the fusing lamp ( x 1) Rear terminal of the fusing lamp ( x 1, x 3) Fusing lamp rear bracket [A] ( x 1) D086/D087 4-112...
  • Page 289 Fusing Fusing lamp [A] Remove the fusing lamp without touching the glass part [B]. Pay attention to the direction of the fusing lamp during the re-installation. 4-113 D086/D087...

  • Page 290: Pressure Roller And Pressure Roller Bearing

    Fusing 4.11.8 PRESSURE ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER BEARING Heating roller( p.4-103) Fusing lamp ( p.4-110) One-way clutch gear [A] Pressure roller gear [B] at the rear side Pressure roller bearing [A] at the rear side (C-ring x 1) Front terminal [A] ( x 1) Lamp holder front bracket [B] ( x 1)

  • Page 291: When Re-Installing The Pressure Roller

    Fusing Keep the pressure roller stripper plate [A] open. 10. Pressure roller [B] When re-installing the pressure roller Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the front shaft of the pressure roller at 2 mm from the notch [A], and to the rear shaft of the pressure roller at 2 mm from the edge [B]. (Apply the lubricant to half of the circumference of the pressure roller, as shown in the lower of the three above diagrams.) 4-115...
  • Page 292 Fusing Make sure that pressure roller bearing [C] at the front side is set as shown above. Pressure Roller Stripper Plate Installation When reinstalling the pressure roller stripper plate: Set the springs [A] (front and rear) correctly as shown above. Install the pressure roller stripper plate [B] in the fusing unit frame as shown above.

  • Page 293: Stripper Plates

    Fusing down. 4.11.9 STRIPPER PLATES Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Heating roller ( p.4-103) Heating roller stripper plate [A] (spring x 2) Pressure roller ( p.4-112) Pressure roller stripper plate [A] (spring x 2) 4-117 D086/D087...

  • Page 294: Cleaning Requirement

    Fusing Cleaning Requirement The stripper plates require cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the stripper plates with a dry cloth, and then clean the stripper plates again with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the points shown above. D086/D087 4-118...

  • Page 295: Heating Roller Thermistor

    Fusing 4.11.10 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Fusing right cover ( p.4-110 "Fusing Lamp") Fusing bottom cover [A] ( x 5) Heating roller thermistor with bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Heating roller thermistor [A] ( x 1) 4-119 D086/D087...

  • Page 296: Pressure Roller Thermostat

    Fusing 4.11.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Fusing right cover ( p.4-103 "Heating Roller and Heating Roller Bearing") Fusing bottom cover ( p.4-117 "Heating Roller Thermistor") Entrance guide plate [A] ( x 2) The entrance guide plate must be removed with the orientation of the fusing unit as shown above, to protect the surface of the heating roller from damage.

  • Page 297: Pressure Roller Thermistors

    Fusing 4.11.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS Pressure Roller Thermistor: Center Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Fusing bottom cover ( p.4-117 "Heating Roller Thermistor") Thermistor base [A] ( x 1) Pressure roller thermistor: center [A] (hooks) 4-121 D086/D087...

  • Page 298: Pressure Roller Thermistor: End

    Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor: End Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Fusing right cover ( p.4-103 "Heating Roller and Heating Roller Bearing") Fusing bottom cover ( p.4-117 "Heating Roller Thermistor") Pressure roller thermistor: end bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4.11.13 FUSING FAN Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover (...

  • Page 299: When Installing The Fusing Fan

    Fusing When installing the fusing fan Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine. 4.11.14 PAPER EXIT FAN Open the right door. Front right cover ( p.4-20 "Operation Panel") Paper exit fan [A] ( x 1, hook x 3) When installing the paper exit fan Make sure that the paper exit fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the...

  • Page 300: Ih (Induction Heating) Inverter Fan

    Fusing 4.11.15 IH (INDUCTION HEATING) INVERTER FAN Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) IH inverter fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) IH inverter fan [B] ( x 2) When installing the IH inverter fan Make sure that the IH inverter fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side of the machine.

  • Page 301: Thermopile

    Fusing 4.11.16 THERMOPILE Open the right door. Front right cover ( p.4-20 "Operation Panel") Pull out trays 1 and 2, and the image transfer belt unit. Right front cover [A] and front inner cover [B] Bracket [A] ( x 1) IH coil unit [A] First, release the front side of the IH coil unit.

  • Page 302: When Cleaning The Lens Of The Thermopile

    Fusing Thermopile bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 3) Thermopile ( x 2) When cleaning the lens of the thermopile Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise, you may get a serious burn. Do not push the thermostats on the IH coil unit.

  • Page 303: Pressure Roller Hp Sensor

    Fusing Clean with a cotton-swab dipped in alcohol. 4.11.17 PRESSURE ROLLER HP SENSOR Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-99) Pressure roller HP sensor ( x 1, x 1) 4-127 D086/D087...

  • Page 304: Ih Coil Fan

    Fusing 4.11.18 IH COIL FAN Open the right door. Front right cover ( p.4-20 "Operation Panel") Pull out trays 1 and 2, and the image transfer belt unit ( p.4-123) Right front cover and front inner cover ( p.4-123) IH coil fan bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
  • Page 305 Fusing IH inverter bracket [A] x 3) Ground cable [B] ( x 1, x 1) Remove the connector [A]. 10. Pull the Harness [A] in the arrow direction. 4-129 D086/D087...
  • Page 306 Fusing 11. Bracket [A] ( x 1) 12. IH coil unit [A] (First, release the front side of the IH coil unit.) D086/D087 4-130...

  • Page 307: Paper Feed

    Paper Feed 4.12 PAPER FEED 4.12.1 PAPER FEED UNIT Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Duplex unit ( p.4-143) Pull out tray 1 and tray 2. Paper guide plate [A] (tab x 2) Harness cover [A] ( x 1) Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2,...

  • Page 308: Separation Roller, Feed Roller And Pick-Up Belt Unit

    Paper Feed 4.12.2 SEPARATION ROLLER, FEED ROLLER AND PICK-UP BELT UNIT Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper feed unit ( p.4-129) Separation roller [A] ( x 1) Roller holder [B] ( x 1) Feed roller [A] Pick-up belt unit [B] D086/D087 4-132...

  • Page 309: Tray Lift Motor

    Paper Feed 4.12.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") High voltage supply board bracket ( p.4-161) Tray lift motor 1 [A] or 2 [B] ( x 2, x 3, x 1 each) 4-133 D086/D087...

  • Page 310: Vertical Transport, Paper Overflow, Paper End And Paper Feed Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.12.4 VERTICAL TRANSPORT, PAPER OVERFLOW, PAPER END AND PAPER FEED SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Paper feed unit ( p.4-129) Paper overflow sensor [A] Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each) Vertical transport sensor bracket [D] ( x 1,...

  • Page 311: Registration Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.12.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Paper guide plate 1 [A] and 2 [B] ( x 2 each) Registration sensor [C] ( x 1, hook) 4-135 D086/D087...

  • Page 312: By-Pass Paper Size Sensor And By-Pass Paper Length Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.12.6 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR Open the by-pass tray [A]. Move the side fences to the center. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 4) By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1). By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1) D086/D087 4-136...

  • Page 313: When Reinstalling The By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    Paper Feed When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered). Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection [C] of the left side fence bar.

  • Page 314: By-Pass Bottom Tray

    Paper Feed 4.12.7 BY-PASS BOTTOM TRAY Open the right door. By-pass tray cover ( p.4-134 "By-pass Paper Size Sensor and By-pass Paper Length Sensor") Open the duplex door [A]. Right door cover [B] ( x 4) Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3) D086/D087 4-138...
  • Page 315 Paper Feed Remove the screw at the front side ( x 1). Remove the cover [A] (2 hooks). Remove the screw at the rear side. 4-139 D086/D087...

  • Page 316: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    Paper Feed Release the front [A] and rear [B] arms ( x 1 each). 10. By-pass bottom tray [A] 4.12.8 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR Right door cover ( p.4-136 "By-pass Bottom Tray") By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2). By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hook) D086/D087...

  • Page 317: By-Pass Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Roller, Torque Limiter

    Paper Feed 4.12.9 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER Right door cover ( p.4-136 "By-pass Bottom Tray") By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook) By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1) By-pass feed unit cover ( p.4-138 "By-pass Paper End Sensor") By-pass separation roller [A] ( x 1) Torque limiter [B]...

  • Page 318: By-Pass Feed Clutch

    Paper Feed 4.12.10 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH Open the right door. Right door rear cover ( p.4-136 "By-pass Bottom Tray") By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2) By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1) 4.12.11 PAPER EXIT UNIT Fusing Unit ( p.4-99) Front right cover (...

  • Page 319: Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, Junction Paper Jam And Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Feed 10. Gear cover [A] ( x 1) 11. Paper exit unit [B] ( x 2, x 2) 4.12.12 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, JUNCTION PAPER JAM AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR Paper exit unit ( p.4-140) Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4-143...
  • Page 320 Paper Feed Remove the fusing exit sensor from the fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 1) Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) Junction paper jam sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Remove the junction paper jam sensor from the junction paper jam sensor bracket (hook) Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)

  • Page 321: Duplex Unit

    Duplex Unit 4.13 DUPLEX UNIT 4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Right door cover ( p.4-71 "Paper Transfer Unit") Close the right door [A]. Remove the spring [B]. Open the right door [A]. Release the front link [A] ( x 1).
  • Page 322 Duplex Unit Hold the right door, and then release the wire [A] ( x 1). Keep holding the right door before removing the right door completely. Otherwise, the right door can fall down and injure you. 10. Press the projection [B] to pull the right door shaft into the unit, and then remove the duplex unit [C] ( x 1, x 1,...

  • Page 323: Duplex Door Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.13.2 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR Right door cover ( p.4-71 "Paper Transfer Unit") Open the right door. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) 4-147 D086/D087...

  • Page 324: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.13.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR Right door cover ( p.4-71 " D086/D087 4-148...
  • Page 325 Duplex Unit Paper Transfer Unit") Open the right door. Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2) Duplex entrance sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) Duplex entrance sensor [C] (hook) 4-149 D086/D087...

  • Page 326: Duplex Exit Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.13.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR Paper transfer unit ( p.4-71) Guide plate [A] (two hooks) Duplex exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hook) D086/D087 4-150...

  • Page 327: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4.14.1 BOARDS Controller Box closed FCU (Option) G3 Interface Unit (Option) High Voltage Supply Board (Behind the PSU [D] ) 4-151 D086/D087...
  • Page 328 Electrical Components Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit BICU Controller Board D086/D087 4-152...
  • Page 329 Electrical Components Controller Box Open ITB Power Supply Board 4-153 D086/D087...

  • Page 330: Controller Unit

    Electrical Components 4.14.2 CONTROLLER UNIT Control cover ( p.4-18) Controller unit [A] ( x 5) D086/D087 4-154...

  • Page 331: Controller Box Right Cover

    Electrical Components 4.14.3 CONTROLLER BOX RIGHT COVER Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Controller box right cover [A] ( x 8) 4-155 D086/D087...

  • Page 332: Controller Box

    Electrical Components 4.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX When opening the controller box Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Remove seven screws. Open the controller box [A]. D086/D087 4-156...

  • Page 333: When Removing The Controller Box

    Electrical Components When removing the controller box Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Controller box right cover ( p.4-152) Remove the controller box stay [A] ( x 4). Move the IOB bracket [A] aside ( x 4, x All).
  • Page 334 Electrical Components Disconnect the scanner interface cable [A] (ground cable) Release all clamps on the controller box frame. Disconnect all connectors on the BICU [B] board. 10. Disconnect the connector [C] at the outer controller box and at the inner controller box. 11.

  • Page 335: Iob (In/Out Board)

    Electrical Components 4.14.5 IOB (IN/OUT BOARD) Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Controller box right cover ( p.4-152) IOB [A] ( x 6, All 4-159 D086/D087...

  • Page 336: Bicu

    Electrical Components 4.14.6 BICU Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Controller box right cover ( p.4-152) Disconnect the harness (CN225) on the IOB board. Move the IOB bracket aside ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") BICU [A] ( x 5, x All) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BICU.

  • Page 337: Psu

    Electrical Components 4.14.7 PSU PSU bracket Rear cover ( p.4-19) Ventilation duct [A] ( x 2) PSU bracket [B] ( x 6, x All, x All) PSU board Rear cover ( p.4-19) Ventilation duct (see "PSU bracket") PSU board [A] ( x 11, all s, all 4-161...

  • Page 338: Power Relay Switch

    Electrical Components 4.14.8 POWER RELAY SWITCH PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") Pull out tray 2. Tray left rail cover [A] ( x 1) Take aside the cords and ferrite core [B] ( x 2). Power relay switch [A] ( x 2) D086/D087 4-162...

  • Page 339: Itb Power Supply Board

    Electrical Components 4.14.9 ITB POWER SUPPLY BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-19) Scanner rear cover ( p.4-26 "Exposure Lamp") Open the controller box ( p.4-153 "Controller Box") ITB power supply board [A] ( x 5, x 6) 4.14.10 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket (...

  • Page 340: High Voltage Supply Board Bracket

    Electrical Components 4.14.11 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD BRACKET Rear cover ( p.4-19) PSU bracket ( p.4-158 "PSU") High voltage supply board bracket [A] ( x 3, x All, x 2) 4.14.12 IH INVERTER Rear cover ( p.4-19) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Fusing duct ( p.4-120 "Fusing Fan")

  • Page 341: Controller Board

    Electrical Components 4.14.13 CONTROLLER BOARD Controller unit ( p.4-151) Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 3) Interface rails [A], NV-RAM [B], RAM-DIMM [C] 4-165 D086/D087...

  • Page 342: When Installing The New Controller Board

    Electrical Components When installing the new controller board Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board. Then install it on the new controller board after you replace the controller board. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective. Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data"...

  • Page 343: Hdd

    Electrical Components 4.14.15 HDD Controller unit ( p.4-151) Remove the HDD [A] with the bracket ( x 4, x 2). Remove the HDD from the bracket [A] ( x 4). When installing a new HDD unit Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted. Install the stamp data using "SP5853".

  • Page 344: Disposal Of Hdd Units

    Electrical Components Disposal of HDD Units Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client. If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping. The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.

  • Page 345: Nvram Replacement Procedure

    Electrical Components 4.14.16 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE NVRAM on the BICU Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. Output the SMC data ("ALL") using SP5-990-001. Turn off the main switch. Remove the VM card from SD card Slot #2 (lower slot). Insert a blank SD card into Slot #2, and then turn on the main power switch.
  • Page 346 Electrical Components NOTE: The value of the total counter is reset to "0" when the NVRAM is replaced. 17. Do Process Control Self-check. 18. Do ACC for the Copier function. 19. Do ACC for the Printer function. NOTE: Do all of the following if SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) cannot be performed for some reason: 20.

  • Page 347: Using Dip Switches

    Using Dip Switches 4.15 USING DIP SWITCHES 4.15.1 CONTROLLER BOARD DIP SW No. Boot-up from Flash Boot-up from SD card Memory Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch 2 to 8 settings. 4.15.2 BICU BOARD DIP SW No. Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch 1 and 2 settings.

  • Page 349: System Maintenance

    SYSTEM MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 351: Service Program Mode

    Service Program Mode 5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data.

  • Page 352: Types Of Sp Modes

    Service Program Mode 5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.

  • Page 353: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    Service Program Mode Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number.

  • Page 354: Selecting The Program Number

    Service Program Mode Selecting the Program Number Program numbers have two or three levels. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust.

  • Page 355: Exiting Service Mode

    Service Program Mode Exiting Service Mode Press the Exit key on the touch-panel. Service Mode Lock/Unlock At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.

  • Page 356: Remarks

    Service Program Mode 5.1.4 REMARKS Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated.

  • Page 357: Others

    Service Program Mode Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field.

  • Page 358: Main Sp Tables-1

    Main SP Tables-1 5.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1 5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1or Thick 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode.
  • Page 359 Main SP Tables-1 021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG 024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG [Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment 1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode.
  • Page 360 Main SP Tables-1 009 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step] 012 By-pass: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 013 By-pass: Middle Thick *ENG 014 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step] 018 Duplex: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]...
  • Page 361 Main SP Tables-1 1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray. This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than 8.5”.
  • Page 362 Main SP Tables-1 011 Time:Warm *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 sec/step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for hot temperature in color mode. 012 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 013 Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 363 Main SP Tables-1 [Feed Permit Setting] 1102 Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing. Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center 002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:Upper *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center 004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End...
  • Page 364 Main SP Tables-1 Temp.:Upper *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Delta:End:Sp.2 Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Press:Sp.2 018 Rotation Time:Sp2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 sec/step] 1105...
  • Page 365 Main SP Tables-1 Plain2:FC:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full coloe printing. Plain2:BW:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing.
  • Page 366 Main SP Tables-1 025 Thick3:FC:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 170 / 1 deg/step] 026 Thick3:FC:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 027 Thick3:BW:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step] 028 Thick3:BW:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 367 Main SP Tables-1 Plain1:BW:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:FC:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:FC:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:BW:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:BW:Press:Low *ENG...
  • Page 368 Main SP Tables-1 Special1:FC:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special1:FC:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special1:BW:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special1:BW:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:FC:Center:Low *ENG...
  • Page 369 Main SP Tables-1 Envelop:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 170 / 1 deg/step] Speed Envelop:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Thin:FC:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Speed Thin:FC:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Thin:BW:Center:Low *ENG...
  • Page 370 Main SP Tables-1 1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting] Standby Heater Off Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the time that the fusing heater turns off after the fusing unit temperature has reached its target temperature. Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 371 Main SP Tables-1 1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing] Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
  • Page 372 Main SP Tables-1 1113 [Curl Correction] [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] Execute Pattern *ENG 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On Selects the curl correction type. Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step] Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
  • Page 373 Main SP Tables-1 CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in middle humidity. CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high humidity.
  • Page 374 Main SP Tables-1 003 Low :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 5 %/step] Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition. 004 Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 5 %/step] Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition.
  • Page 375 Main SP Tables-1 High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 235 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3 Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size. High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A4 Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 paper size.
  • Page 376 Main SP Tables-1 High:2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A5:Press Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A5 paper size. High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A5:Press Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size.
  • Page 377 Main SP Tables-1 1141 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info] 001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number. 002 SC Cause *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step] 101 Htg Roller:Ctr Diff1 *ENG [0 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature at the 102 Htg Rolloer:Ctr Det1 *ENG...
  • Page 378 Main SP Tables-1 204 Htg Roller:End Diff3 *ENG 205 Htg Roller:End Det3 *ENG [0 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] 206 Htg Roller:End Corr3 *ENG 207 Press Roller Temp Value3 *ENG [0 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] 1142 [Fusing Jam Detection] SC Display...
  • Page 379 Main SP Tables-1 Depressure Position *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 220 / 10 msec/step] Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the depression position (no pressure). Shift Time *ENG [0 to 3600 / 5 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the timing for depressing the fusing unit.
  • Page 380 Main SP Tables-1 151 Pressure:Plain1/2:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low speed. 0: Depression position (no pressure) 1: Position 1 (less pressure) 2: Position 2 3: Position 3 (strongest pressure) 152 Pressure:M-thick:Low Speed...
  • Page 381 Main SP Tables-1 1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check] 001 Execute [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller. If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or install a new fusing unit.
  • Page 382 Main SP Tables-1 1801 [Motor Speed Adj.] FA 001 Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 002 Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step] 003 Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 004 Registration:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 383 Main SP Tables-1 021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high *ENG 023 Duplex CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG 024 Reverse CW:Normal:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step] 025 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] 026 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step] 028 Reverse CW:Thick1:Mid...
  • Page 384 Main SP Tables-1 060 KOpcDevMot:High *ENG 061 KOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.6 / 0.01 %/step] 062 KOpcDevMot:Low *ENG 063 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step] 064 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step] 065 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]...
  • Page 385 Main SP Tables-1 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] Drum Adjust *ENG 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables the drum amplitude adjustment. 101 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG 102 COpcDevMot:High *ENG [–7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step] 103 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG 104 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG...
  • Page 386 Main SP Tables-1 Long:Registration:Middle *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] Thick:Low Long:Registration:Thick *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1 / 0.1 %/step] 1:Middle 126 Long:Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 127 Long:Registration:Thick 2:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 128 Long:Registration:Thick 3:Low...
  • Page 387 Main SP Tables-1 1902 [Amplitude Control] 001 Execute Execute the drum phase adjustment. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1] Displays the result of the drum phase adjustment. 002 Result *ENG 0: Successfully done 2: Sampling failure 3: Insufficient detection number [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on 003 Auto Execution...
  • Page 388 Main SP Tables-1 [Fan Start Time Set] 1951 Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end. 002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step] 006 Main Suction Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step] 007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 0 / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 389 Main SP Tables-1 [Extra Fan Control] 1953 Configures the settings of extra fan control. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG 0: Off, 1: On Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off. Extra Fan Cooling: Time: [0 to 180 / C2.5a: 110, C2.5b: 100 / 1 *ENG...
  • Page 390 Main SP Tables-1 [Extra Fan Control] 1954 Configures the settings of extra fan control. Fan Cooling Time:Fusing *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Exit Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Main *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Suction Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Paper *ENG...

  • Page 391: Main Sp Tables-2

    Main SP Tables-2 5.3 MAIN SP TABLES-2 5.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) [Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) 2005 Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&FINE: Low speed Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
  • Page 392 Main SP Tables-2 015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step] 016 HVP:Plain *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step] 017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step] 018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step] [Charge AC Voltage] Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment...
  • Page 393 Main SP Tables-2 2012 [Charge Output Control] Selects the AC voltage control type. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control 1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided with SP2006.) 2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity.
  • Page 394 Main SP Tables-2 Changes the humidity threshold Absolute Humidity: *ENG between MM and MH. Threshold 3 [0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.01 g/m /step] Changes the humidity threshold Absolute Humidity: *ENG between MH and HH. Threshold 4 [0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.01 g/m /step] Displays the current temperature.
  • Page 395 Main SP Tables-2 2015 [Charge AC Adj: Result] 001 Bk *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Success 002 M *ENG 1: Out of tolerance range 003 C *ENG 2: Out of adjustable range 3: Adjustment incompleted 004 Y *ENG [Color Registration Correction] FA...
  • Page 396 Main SP Tables-2 2103 [Erase Margin Adjustment] (Area, Paper Size) Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins. 001 Lead Edge Width *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step] 002 Trail. Edge Width *ENG 003 Left *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step] 004 Right...
  • Page 397 Main SP Tables-2 2105 [LD Power Adj.] (Process Speed, Color) Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed. Each LD power setting is decided by process control. 001 High Speed: Bk *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step] Decreasing a value makes lines thinner 002 High Speed: Ma *ENG...
  • Page 398 Main SP Tables-2 [Test Pattern] 2109 Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD. 003 Pattern Selection [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 13.
  • Page 399 Main SP Tables-2 2111 [Forced Line Position Adj.] Executes the fine line position adjustment twice. 001 Mode a If this SP is not completed (NG is displayed), do SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again. Executes the fine line position adjustment once.
  • Page 400 Main SP Tables-2 2118 [Skew Adjustment] 001 Execute: M *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to the values specified with SP2117. 002 Execute: C *ENG These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when SC2.585 occurs.
  • Page 401 Main SP Tables-2 034 Area 7: Bk *ENG 035 Area 8: Bk *ENG 036 Area 9: Bk *ENG 037 Area 10: Bk *ENG Not used 038 Area 11: Bk *ENG 039 Area 12: Bk *ENG 079 Area 0: Ma *ENG Not used Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
  • Page 402 Main SP Tables-2 133 Area 2: Cy *ENG 134 Area 3: Cy *ENG 135 Area 4: Cy *ENG 136 Area 5: Cy *ENG 137 Area 6: Cy *ENG 138 Area 7: Cy *ENG 139 Area 8: Cy *ENG 140 Area 9: Cy *ENG 141 Area 10: Cy *ENG...
  • Page 403 Main SP Tables-2 [Area Shad. Correct. Setting] FA Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power. The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1 to area 14. 2152 For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 404 Main SP Tables-2 This is for the synchronizing detection 033 Area 0: M *ENG board. 034 Area 1: M *ENG 035 Area 2: M *ENG 036 Area 3: M *ENG 037 Area 4: M *ENG 038 Area 5: M *ENG 039 Area 6: M *ENG 040 Area 7: M...
  • Page 405 Main SP Tables-2 068 Area 3: C *ENG 069 Area 4: C *ENG 070 Area 5: C *ENG 071 Area 6: C *ENG 072 Area 7: C *ENG 073 Area 8: C *ENG 074 Area 9: C *ENG 075 Area 10: C *ENG 076 Area 11: C *ENG...
  • Page 406 Main SP Tables-2 103 Area 6: Y *ENG 104 Area 7: Y *ENG 105 Area 8: Y *ENG 106 Area 9: Y *ENG 107 Area 10: Y *ENG 108 Area 11: Y *ENG 109 Area 12: Y *ENG 110 Area 13: Y *ENG 111 Area 14: Y *ENG...
  • Page 407 Main SP Tables-2 2181 [Line Position Adj. Result] Displays the values for each correction. "Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value between two sheets of paper. "Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value. "M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction.
  • Page 408 Main SP Tables-2 014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG 015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG 016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG 017 S. Cor.: 600 Line: M *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 018 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 019 S.
  • Page 409 Main SP Tables-2 036 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 037 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: C *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 038 S. Cor.: 1200 Sub: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 039 Skew: Y *ENG...
  • Page 410 Main SP Tables-2 [Line Position Adj. Offset] 2182 (Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan 001 M Magnification *ENG Adjusts the line position manually. 002 C Magnification *ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step] 003 Y Magnification *ENG When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment, do this SP.
  • Page 411 Main SP Tables-2 018 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 019 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 021 M.
  • Page 412 Main SP Tables-2 [Main Scan Length Detection Disp.] Displays/adjusts the target value for the main scan magnification correction of the line position adjustment. After replacing the laser optics housing unit, input the standard value for Bk 2185 provided with the new unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement Adjustment"...
  • Page 413 Main SP Tables-2 Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode during job. Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs.
  • Page 414 Main SP Tables-2 Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step] Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions. Magnification *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment.
  • Page 415 Main SP Tables-2 2194 [MUSIC Execution Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step] Displays the year of the last MUSIC execution. Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step] Displays the month of the last MUSIC execution.
  • Page 416 Main SP Tables-2 D086/D087 5-66...
  • Page 417 Main SP Tables-2 [Music A/D Interval] 2198 ADC Trigger Counter 001 ADC Trigger Counter *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step] [Skew Origin Set] 2220 Executes the skew motor initialization in the laser optics unit. 001 M: Skew Motor 002 C: Skew Motor 003 Y: Skew Motor [LD Power] LD Power Control...
  • Page 418 Main SP Tables-2 010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG 011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG 012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG [Development DC Vias] Development DC Bias Adjustment Adjusts the development bias. Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001 2229 Default: ON) is activated.
  • Page 419 Main SP Tables-2 [Temperature/Humidity: Display] 2241 Displays the environment temperature and humidity. 001 Temperature [–1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1deg/step] 002 Relative Humidity [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 %RH/step] 003 Absolute Humidity [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m /step] [Environmental Correction: Transfer] 2302...
  • Page 420 Main SP Tables-2 Adjusts the threshold value between MM Absolute Humidity: *ENG and MH. Threshold 3 [0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m /step] Adjusts the threshold value between MH Absolute Humidity: *ENG and HH. Threshold 4 [0 to 100 / 24 / 0.01 g/m /step] 007 Temp Threshold *ENG...
  • Page 421 Main SP Tables-2 2311 [Non Image Area: Bias] Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt between images. This value is added to the 001 Image Transfer *ENG value of the image transfer belt bias. [10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step] Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller 002 Paper Transfer *ENG...
  • Page 422 Main SP Tables-2 [Common: BW: Bias] Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment 2351 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed ITB unit: Plain *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper. ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1...
  • Page 423 Main SP Tables-2 ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for plain paper. ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
  • Page 424 Main SP Tables-2 ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for Thick 2 and fine. ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for...
  • Page 425 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Bias] 2401 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain paper. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed Separation DC: Plain: 1st *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 –V/step] Side Separation DC: Plain: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 426 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Bias: FC] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color 2407 mode. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG [0 to 250 / 27 / 1 – A /step] Side Paper Transfer: Plain: *ENG...
  • Page 427 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper Side: S2 width) [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper 2nd Side: S2 width) [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 428 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 240 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper Side: S4 width) Paper Transfer: 1200: *ENG [100 to 600 / 340 / 5%/step] 2nd Side: S4 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] *ENG...
  • Page 429 Main SP Tables-2 Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge 2421 in each mode. SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values. 005-008 The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422. Separation DC: Plain: *ENG 1st Side Separation DC: Plain:...
  • Page 430 Main SP Tables-2 Separation DC: 1200: 1st *ENG Side Separation DC: 1200: *ENG 2nd Side [Plain: Trailing Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these 2423 SP values.
  • Page 431 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2424 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 432 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin: Bias: FC] 2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 –...
  • Page 433 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin: Leading Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values. 2471 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2472.
  • Page 434 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin: Trailing Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these 2473 SP values. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2474.
  • Page 435 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin: Environment Correction] 2480 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] Side Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st *ENG...
  • Page 436 Main SP Tables-2 2484 [Glossy: Paper Size Correction] 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S3 *ENG [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S4...
  • Page 437 Main SP Tables-2 2489 [Glossy: Environment Correction] 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] 003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] [Thick 1: Bias]...
  • Page 438 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Bias: FC] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color 2507 mode. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side...
  • Page 439 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side: *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd...
  • Page 440 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Leading Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values. 2521 Thick 1: Middle speed, 1200: Low speed The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2522.
  • Page 441 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Trailing Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these 2523 SP values.
  • Page 442 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Environment Correction] 2530 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side...
  • Page 443 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 2: Bias: FC] 2558 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in full color mode. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 16 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 –...
  • Page 444 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm >...
  • Page 445 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 2: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2572 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG...
  • Page 446 Main SP Tables-2 2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction] 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd Side *ENG 005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st Side...
  • Page 447 Main SP Tables-2 [OHP: Paper Size Correction] 2611 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values. [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 001 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG S1 size >...
  • Page 448 Main SP Tables-2 [OHP: Switch Timing: Leadn. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2622 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 002 Separation DC *ENG...
  • Page 449 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick3: Bias] 2650 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 3. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 1000 / 10 –V/step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [Thick3: Bias: BW] 2651 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in black-and-white mode.
  • Page 450 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step] 004 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm >...
  • Page 451 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 3: Leading Edge Correction] Thick 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading 2654 edge in each mode. SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values. The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2655.
  • Page 452 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 3: Trailing Edge Correction] Thick 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing 2656 edge in each mode. SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values. The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2657.
  • Page 453 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 3: Environment Correction] Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2660 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as MM, SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side...
  • Page 454 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick4: Bias: FC] 2672 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 4 in full color mode. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 –...
  • Page 455 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S3 *ENG 275 mm >...
  • Page 456 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 4: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2675 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG 002 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG...
  • Page 457 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 4: Environment Correction] Thick 4 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2680 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as MM, SP2671 and SP2672 are multiplied by these SP values. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side...
  • Page 458 Main SP Tables-2 [Special1: Bias: FC] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color 2757 mode. Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 33 / 1 –...
  • Page 459 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step] 018 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading 2771 edge in each mode.
  • Page 460 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 1: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2772 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]...
  • Page 461 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 1: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2774 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 462 Main SP Tables-2 [Special2: Bias] 2801 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 2. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 –V/step] 003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [Special2: Bias: BW]...
  • Page 463 Main SP Tables-2 [Special2: Paper Size Correction] 2811 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size >...
  • Page 464 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 2: Leading Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading 2821 edge in each mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2822.
  • Page 465 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 2: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2822 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 466 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 2: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2824 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 467 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 3: Bias] 2851 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 3. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 –V/step] 003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [Special 3: Bias: BW]...
  • Page 468 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 3: Paper Size Correction] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for 2861 each paper size. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values. Thick 1: Middle speed Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 1st Side: *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size >...
  • Page 469 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 1st Side: *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 2nd *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper Side: S5 width) [Special 3: Leading Edge Correction] Special 3 Paper: Leading Edge...
  • Page 470 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 3: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2872 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 471 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 3: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2874 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 472 Main SP Tables-2 [Dev Rvs Time] Development Roller Reverse Time Specified the time of the development roller reverse rotation after the 2905 development unit has stopped. The reverse rotation of the development roller is used for removing dust from the development roller. 001 K *ENG 002 M...
  • Page 473 Main SP Tables-2 2920 [Transfer Motor Control] 0: Encorder 1 :FG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Selects the speed control mode for the ITB. If SC443 occurs and machine does not recover, change this setting to "1". SC443 Count *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 474 Main SP Tables-2 2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing Standard Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step] Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller. 002 Medium Speed *ENG [–790 to 410 / 0 / 10 msec/step] 003 Low Speed *ENG [–790 to 410 / 0 / 10 msec/step]...
  • Page 475 Main SP Tables-2 2990 Print Duty Control [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 Duty Control State *ENG 0: No limit, 1: Limit 002 Duty Control Thresh Time *ENG [0 to 195 / 30 / 10 min./step] 003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Forced CPM Down...
  • Page 476 Main SP Tables-3 5.4 MAIN SP TABLES-3 5.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal Check the result with SP3-325-001 and 3-012-001 after executing this SP. Executes the toner density adjustment 002 Density Adjustment manually.
  • Page 477 Main SP Tables-3 [Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result Displays the result of the latest process control self-check. All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “Y C M K” 3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful.
  • Page 478 Main SP Tables-3 [T Sensor Initial Set Result: Display] 3014 Developer Initialization Result: Display [0 to 9999 / 9999 / 1 /step ] Display: YCMK *ENG 1: Success, 2 to 9: Failure Displays the developer initialization result. See section "Developer Initialization Result"...
  • Page 479 Main SP Tables-3 3041 [Process Control Type] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric 0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the Voltage Control *ENG charge DC bias and development DC bias set with SP2-005 and SP2-229.) 1: CONTROL Enables or disables potential control.
  • Page 480 Main SP Tables-3 3043 [TD Adjustment Mode] Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
  • Page 481 Main SP Tables-3 Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.) 6 to 9: Disabled...
  • Page 482 Main SP Tables-3 Consumption pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step] Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment. Consumption pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]...
  • Page 483 Main SP Tables-3 Consumption Pattern: LD: DUTY: Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment. In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values (SP3611-005) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
  • Page 484 Main SP Tables-3 [Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color]) 3044 Selects the toner supply method type. 001 Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with 002 M *ENG SP 3401) 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed) 003 C *ENG...
  • Page 485 Main SP Tables-3 [TD Sensor: Vt Display] 3201 Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: C *ENG 004 Current: Y *ENG [Vt Shift: Display/Set] 3211...
  • Page 486 Main SP Tables-3 014 Low TCShift: M *ENG 015 Low TCShift: C *ENG 016 Low TCShift: Y *ENG [Vtcnt: Display/Set] 3221 Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: M *ENG [2 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: C *ENG 004 Current: Y...
  • Page 487 Main SP Tables-3 [Vtref: Display/Set] 3222 Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: C *ENG 004 Current: Y *ENG Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.
  • Page 488 Main SP Tables-3 006 (-)Consumption: M *ENG 007 (-)Consumption: C *ENG 008 (-)Consumption: Y *ENG 009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank. 009 P Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step] 010 P Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.05 / 0.1 /step] 011 P Rank 3 Threshold...
  • Page 489 Main SP Tables-3 [LD Power Setting] 3242 Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control. StdSpd:Coefficient: *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 101 / 1 /step] 002 StdSpd:Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 62 / 1 /step] 003 StdSpd:Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 99 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 490 Main SP Tables-3 020 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 67 / 1 /step] 021 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 82 / 1 /step] 022 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step] 023 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 68 / 1 /step] 024 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 87 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 491 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251-018. 009 Average M: Bk *ENG 010 Average M: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step] 011 Average M: C...
  • Page 492 Main SP Tables-3 024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color. 024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG 025 Latest Coverage: M *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step] 026 Latest Coverage: C *ENG 027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.
  • Page 493 Main SP Tables-3 3321 [Vsg Adjustment: Execution] Execute the ID sensor initialization 010 P/TM Sensor All setting for all sensors [Vsg Adjustment Result: Vsg] 3322 Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor. 001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG 002 Vsg reg: M *ENG...
  • Page 494 Main SP Tables-3 005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG 006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG 008 Result: Latest 7 *ENG 009 Result: Latest 8 *ENG 010 Result: Latest 9 *ENG [Fixed Supply Mode] 3401 Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode. 001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]...
  • Page 495 Main SP Tables-3 3421 [Toner Supply Range] 001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during 002 Upper Limit: M *ENG printing. 003 Upper Limit: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] 004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG 005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG...
  • Page 496 Main SP Tables-3 007 Vsg Adj. *ENG 008 Charge AC Control *ENG 009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG 010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG [Execution Interval: Setting] 3511 Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode. 001 Job End: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step] 002 Job End: Potential Control: FC...
  • Page 497 Main SP Tables-3 Correction Coefficient 1: JE: *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 page/step] Correction Coefficient 2: JE: *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step] 024 Correction Coefficient 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step] 025 Correction Coefficient 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]...
  • Page 498 Main SP Tables-3 [PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk] 3513 Displays the last time that the PCDU motors stopped. These are used for process control execution timing. 001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step] 002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1/step] 003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step]...
  • Page 499 Main SP Tables-3 [Execution Interval: Display] Displays the current interval for process control execution. 3515 When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions. Job End: Potential *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step] Control: BW...
  • Page 500 Main SP Tables-3 [ITB Idling Number] 3520 Specifies the number of the ITB idling rotation for each condition. 001 Temperature: H *ENG 002 Temperature: M *ENG [0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step] 003 Temperature: L *ENG 004 Temperature: L: Power ON *ENG [Temperature Threshold] Specifies the threshold temperature for each condition.
  • Page 501 Main SP Tables-3 [Rapi_timer] Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time-out time for the Rapi timer. [Non-use Time Process Control Setting] Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by. 3531 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is executed.
  • Page 502 Main SP Tables-3 010 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG development gamma for each color. [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 011 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG 012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development 013 Environmental Correction *ENG...
  • Page 503 Main SP Tables-3 [Development DC Control: Display] Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color. 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG...
  • Page 504 Main SP Tables-3 006 Thick 1 & FINE: M *ENG 007 Thick 1 & FINE: C *ENG 008 Thick 1& FINE: Y *ENG 009 Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step] 011 Thick 2 &...
  • Page 505 Main SP Tables-3 [LD Power Control: Display] Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed 3651 Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment. 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] 003 Plain: C *ENG 004 Plain: Y...
  • Page 506 Main SP Tables-3 [HST Concentration Control: Bk] 3711 Displays the factory settings of the black PCDU. 001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step] 002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step] 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / 2.1 / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM...
  • Page 507 Main SP Tables-3 [HST Concentration Control: M] 3712 Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCDU. 001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step] 002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step] 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / 2.1 / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM...
  • Page 508 Main SP Tables-3 006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step] 007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step] 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2...
  • Page 509 Main SP Tables-3 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step] 012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG [0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step] 013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm...
  • Page 510 Main SP Tables-3 Enables or disables the calling for @Remote. Notice Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Enable @Remote calling 1: Disable @Remote calling NOTE: If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle near full.
  • Page 511 Main SP Tables-3 [New PCU Detection] 3901 Turns new PCDU detection on or off. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON [Manual New Unit Set] Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off. 3902 The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section 3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
  • Page 512 Main SP Tables-3 013 Image Transfer Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON Do not use 3902-013 if you only change 015 Cleaning Unit *ENG the cleaning unit. 3902-015: This is for the image transfer 016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG belt cleaning unit.
  • Page 513 Main SP Tables-4 5.5 MAIN SP TABLES-4 5.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) [Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 514 Main SP Tables-4 007 ADF: Right 008 ADF: Left [Scanner Free Run] Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following 4013 mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT 001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON...
  • Page 515 Main SP Tables-4 Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Off 003 Correction Level *ENG 1: Weakest 2: Weak 3: Strong 4: Strongest Dust *ENG Not used Detect:On/Off:Rear 012 Dust Detect:Lvl:Rear...
  • Page 516 Main SP Tables-4 [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Normal Detection (the machine detects A4/LT size as A4 or LT, depending on the 4305 [8K/16K Detection] *ENG paper size setting) 1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise 2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise 3: 8K 16K 001 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
  • Page 517 Main SP Tables-4 [Scan Size Detect Value] 4310 Displays the detected value by CCD. Each detection point for paper size and color is displayed on the LCD. 001 S1:R *ENG 002 S1:G *ENG 003 S1:B *ENG 004 S2:R *ENG 005 S2:G *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit/step] 006 S2:B...
  • Page 518 Main SP Tables-4 [IPU Test Pattern] 4417 Selects the IPU test pattern. 001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ] 0: Scanned image 13: Grid pattern CMYK 1: Gradation main scan A 14: Color patch CMYK 2: Gradation main scan B 15: Gray pattern (1) 3: Gradation main scan C...
  • Page 519 Main SP Tables-4 [ACC Target Density] 4501 Selects the ACC result. 001 Copy: K: Text *ENG 002 Copy: C: Text *ENG 003 Copy: M: Text *ENG 004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step] 10: Darkest density 005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG 006 Copy: C: Photo...
  • Page 520 Main SP Tables-4 [ACC Cor:Dark] 4506 Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern. 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 521 Main SP Tables-4 045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B 4600 [SBU Version Display] 001 SBU_ID Displays the ID of the SBU. 002 GASBU-N_ID Displays the ID of the GASBU. 003 VSP5100_ID Displays t he ID of the VSP5100. 4602 [Scanner Memory Access] Enables the read and write check for the 001 Scanner Memory Access SBU registers.
  • Page 522 Main SP Tables-4 4611 [Gray Balance Set: B] 001 Book Read [-512 to 511 / -28 / 1 digit/step] 002 DF Read [Black Level Fine Adj. Display] 4623 RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the 001 Latest: RE Color CCD circuit board (color printing speed).
  • Page 523 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Rough Adj. Display] 4625 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board 001 Latest: BE Color (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board...
  • Page 524 Main SP Tables-4 [Digital Gain Adjustment] 4632 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Latest: GE Color [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: GO Color [Digital Adjustment] 4633 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Latest: BE Color [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: BO Color...
  • Page 525 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4654 RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Displays the black offset value for the even Last Correct Value: RE red signal in the CCD circuit board (color *ENG Color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd Last Correct Value: RO...
  • Page 526 Main SP Tables-4 [Analog Gain Adjustment] 4658 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Analog Gain Adjustment] 4659 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 527 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4673 RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even red Factory Setting: RE *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board (color Color printing speed)..
  • Page 528 Main SP Tables-4 Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the odd blue Factory Setting: BO *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board (color Color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Analog Gain Adjustment] 4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
  • Page 529 Main SP Tables-4 [Digital Gain Adjustment] 4682 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG [Scan Image Density Adjustment] Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF 4688 or 1-pass DF.
  • Page 530 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Peak Read] 4693 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 RE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 RO [Black Level Peak Read] 4694 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 GE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 GO...
  • Page 531 Main SP Tables-4 4806 [Carriage Save] Moves the carriage from the scanner home position. 001 - Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass. Therefore, do this SP when you transport the machine a long distance. 4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change] [0 to 250 / 0 / 1 /step] 1: Grid pattern 001 -...
  • Page 532 Main SP Tables-4 [Manual Gamma Adj] Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode. 4918 See “Printer Gamma Correction" in the Replacement and Adjustment for how to use. Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen (-001 to 008). For details, see the 009 - "Printer Gamma Correction"...
  • Page 533 Main SP Tables-4 4993 [High Light Correction] Selects the Highlight correction level. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG 0: weakest sensitivity 9: strongest sensitivity Selects the range level of Highlight correction. 002 Range Selection *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 0: weakest skew correction,...
  • Page 534 Main SP Tables-5 5.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 5.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 535 Main SP Tables-5 [Display IP Address] 5055 Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Coverage Counter Display] 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL...
  • Page 536 Main SP Tables-5 010 Developer: M *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display 011 Developer: C *CTL 012 Developer: Y *CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL Image Transfer Cleaning *CTL Unit 015 Fusing Unit *CTL Paper Transfer Roller [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] *CTL Unit 0: Not display, 1: Display...
  • Page 537 Main SP Tables-5 007 Dev Unit:C *CTL 008 Dev Unit:Y *CTL 009 Developer:Bk *CTL 010 Developer:M *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 011 Developer:C *CTL 012 Developer:Y *CTL 013 Int Trans Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 014 Belt Cleaning Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]...
  • Page 538 Main SP Tables-5 5113 [Optional Counter Type] This program specifies the counter type. 0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) Default Optional 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card *CTL Counter Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card 8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer This program specifies the external counter...
  • Page 539 Main SP Tables-5 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap) 5126 [F Size Original Setting] *ENG 1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio) 2: 8" x 13" (F) 001 Selects F size original setting. 5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]...
  • Page 540 Main SP Tables-5 [Fax Printing Mode at Optional] Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This 5167 SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Fax Printing Mode at *CTL 0: Automatic printing...
  • Page 541 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 005 TRAY 2: 4 *ENG 0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 006 TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 *ENG 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]...
  • Page 542 Main SP Tables-5 [RK 4] Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection. 5186 If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 - *ENG...
  • Page 543 Main SP Tables-5 5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / -] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling. If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
  • Page 544 Main SP Tables-5 5307 [Summer Time] [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
  • Page 545 Main SP Tables-5 5404 [User Code Count Clear] 001 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users. 5411 [LDAP Certification] Determines whether easy LDAP 004 Easy Certification *CTL certification is done. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 1: On, 0: Off This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1"...
  • Page 546 Main SP Tables-5 1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered. Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and password after a lockout has occurred. 004 Cancellation Time *CTL This setting is used only if SP5413-3 is set...
  • Page 547 Main SP Tables-5 5416 [Access Information] Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack 001 Access User Max Num *CTL detection functions. [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step] Limits the number of passwords used by Access Password Max the access exclusion and password attack *CTL...
  • Page 548 Main SP Tables-5 [User Authentication] These settings should be done with the System Administrator. 5420 Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled. Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy 001 Copy *CTL applications.
  • Page 549 Main SP Tables-5 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan 031 Scanner *CTL applications. [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: On, 1: Off Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer 041 Printer *CTL applications.
  • Page 550 Main SP Tables-5 5490 [MF KeyCard (Japan only)] Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 001 Job Permit Setting *CTL 0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a user code. 1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user code.
  • Page 551 Main SP Tables-5 [Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level. The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the 5505 error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets). The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
  • Page 552 Main SP Tables-5 [SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue 5515 an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
  • Page 553 Main SP Tables-5 5610 [Base Gamma Control Point: Command] Factory Setting Recalls the factory settings. Restore Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings. Restore Recalls the previous settings. 5611 [Toner Color in 2C] [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
  • Page 554 Main SP Tables-5 5618 [Color Mode Display Selection] [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour, *CTL Single colour 1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White Selects the color selection display on the LCD. Memory Clear (SP5-801) The following tables list the items that are cleared.
  • Page 555 Main SP Tables-5 The following service settings: Bit switches Gamma settings (User & Service) Toner Limit The following user settings: 008 Printer Application Tray Priority Menu Protect System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout) PCL Menu Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and 009 Scanner Application...
  • Page 556 Main SP Tables-5 019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings. 020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings. 021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings. [FreeRun] Performs a free run on the copier engine. The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence 5802 of A4/LT, A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray.
  • Page 557 Main SP Tables-5 [SC Reset] Resets a type A service call condition. 5810 Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code. 001 Fusing SC Reset 5811 [MachineSerial] Machine Serial Number Display 002 Display Displays the machine serial number. 004 BICU Inputs 5812...
  • Page 558 Main SP Tables-5 Operation *CTL Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press #. 5816 [Remote Service] *CTL I/F Setting Selects the remote service setting. [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step] 0: Remote service off 1: CSS remote service on 2: NRS remote service on...
  • Page 559 Main SP Tables-5 SSL Disable Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during an RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Yes. SSL not used. 1: No.
  • Page 560 Main SP Tables-5 RCG – C Registed This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag. 0: Installation not completed 1: Installation completed RCG – C Regist Detail This SP displays the RCG device installation status. 0: RCG device not registered 1: RCG device registered 2: Device registered Connect Type (N/M)
  • Page 561 Main SP Tables-5 Proxy PortNumber This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between the embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N. This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
  • Page 562 Main SP Tables-5 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL. A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection. The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request.
  • Page 563 Main SP Tables-5 CERT:Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued.
  • Page 564 Main SP Tables-5 Displays the PAC version of the @Remote 088 CERT: PAC Version certification. Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces 089 CERT: ID2 Code are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****) indicate that no @Remote certification exists. Displays the common name of the @Remote certification subject.
  • Page 565 Main SP Tables-5 Line Type AutomaticJudgment Press [Execute]. Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is connected as either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so embedded RCG-M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line.
  • Page 566 Main SP Tables-5 Selection Dial/Push This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
  • Page 567 Main SP Tables-5 Dial Up Password Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when setting a user name: Name length: Up to 32 characters Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks (").
  • Page 568 Main SP Tables-5 If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on. SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to interrupt a RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP displays the serial number registered for the 173 Modem Serial Number RCG-M.
  • Page 569 Main SP Tables-5 Allows entry of the number of the request needed for 202 Letter Number the RCG-N device. Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW 203 Confirm Execute URL. 204 Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203.
  • Page 570 Main SP Tables-5 208 Error Code Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed. Cause Code Meaning -11001 Chat parameter error Illegal Modem -11002 Chat execution error Parameter -11003 Unexpected error Inquiry, registration attempted without -12002 acquiring device status.
  • Page 571 Main SP Tables-5 telephone number. -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service -2391 Two registrations for same device -2392 Parameter error -2393 Basil not managed -2394 Device not managed -2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal -2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal...
  • Page 572 Main SP Tables-5 [NV-RAM Data Download] 5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in this section. 001 NV-RAM Download 5828 [Network Setting] *CTL Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility. 1284 Compatibility [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] (Centro)
  • Page 573 Main SP Tables-5 Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each protocol. 0: Validates 1: Invalidates bit0: LPR Job Spooling bit1: FTP (Protocol) bit2: IPP bit3: SMB bit4: BMLinkS bit5: DIPRINT bit6: sftp bit7: (Reserved) Enables or disables the Telnet protocol. TELNET (0: OFF 1: [0 or 1 / 1 / –...
  • Page 574 236 Web Item visible bit0: Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH Web shopping link on the top page and link page of the web system. visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 575 Main SP Tables-5 Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and link page of the web Web supplies Link system. visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Not display, 1:Display This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the 239 Web Link1 Name link page of the web system.
  • Page 576 Main SP Tables-5 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design) 010 HDD Formatting (Log) 011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) 5836 [Capture Settings] *CTL - Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized, displayed, or selected.
  • Page 577 Main SP Tables-5 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: 078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200 skipped) , 6: 2/3 5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB.
  • Page 578 Main SP Tables-5 Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. 101 Primary srv IP address This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Primary srv port This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 579 Main SP Tables-5 This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Reso: Print (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 580 Main SP Tables-5 5840 [IEEE 802.11] [1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step] Channel Max *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN.
  • Page 581 Main SP Tables-5 Selects the WEP key. [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 00: Key #1 011 WEP key Select *CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved) Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
  • Page 582 Main SP Tables-5 5841 [Supply Name Setting] Toner Name Setting: Black Toner Name Setting: Cyan Toner Name Setting: Yellow Toner Name Setting: Magenta OrgStamp Specifies supply names. These Staple Std1 appear on the screen when the *CTL user presses the Inquiry button in Staple Std2 the user tools screen.
  • Page 583 Main SP Tables-5 [Delivery Server Setting] *CTL 5845 Provides items for delivery server settings. FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step] Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server. Range: 000.000.000.000 to IP Address (Primary) 255.255.255.255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address.
  • Page 584 Main SP Tables-5 010 Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function Changes the exists capability of the...
  • Page 585 Main SP Tables-5 Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
  • Page 586 Main SP Tables-5 Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step] Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle. If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed. Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the...
  • Page 587 Main SP Tables-5 Fill Addr Acl Info. This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD.
  • Page 588 Main SP Tables-5 Initialize All Addr Clears all directory information managed by UCS, Book including all user codes. Backup All Addr Uploads all directory information to the SD card. Book Restore All Addr Downloads all directory information from the SD card. Book Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.
  • Page 589 Main SP Tables-5 Complexity option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password. [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step] This SP does not normally require adjustment.
  • Page 590 Main SP Tables-5 004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 005 Rate for Printer B&W 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x...
  • Page 591 Main SP Tables-5 Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 bits) Access Control: User Directory (Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 bits) Switches access control on and off. Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 0000: No access control 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
  • Page 592 Main SP Tables-5 215 Setting: Start Time 216 Setting: Interval Time 217 Setting: Timing 5849 [Installation Date] *CTL The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to 5849 1 Display "Installation Date" or "Inst. Date". Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter.
  • Page 593 Main SP Tables-5 [Stamp Data Download] Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as 5853 required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
  • Page 594 Main SP Tables-5 Save to SD Card Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card. 009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) 010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key) 011 Erase HDD Debug Data 012 Erase SD Card Debug Data 013 Free Space on SD Card...
  • Page 595 Main SP Tables-5 5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL 001 Key 1 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log 005 Key 5 files for functions that use common memory on the controller board.
  • Page 596 Main SP Tables-5 022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ] Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated. 0: No. "From" item not switched. 1: Yes.
  • Page 597 Main SP Tables-5 5873 [SD Card Appli Move] This SP copies the application programs from the original 001 Move Exec SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1. This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot 002 Undo Exec 1.
  • Page 598 Main SP Tables-5 5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing] 001 - Deletes the fixed phrase. [Line Speed Selection] 5883 Selects the line speed for middle thick paper. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: MID CARD: Half Speed (115 mm/sec) 001 Middle Thick *ENG 1: MID CARD: Normal Speed (C2.5c: 154,...
  • Page 599 Main SP Tables-5 Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the WIM when they are transmitted by an e-mail. 100 Signature Setting *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Setting for each e-mail 1: Signature for all 2: No signature Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted...
  • Page 600 Main SP Tables-5 5888 [Personal Information Protect] Selects the protection level for logs. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1} 0: No authentication, No protection for 001 - *CTL logs 1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs) [SDK Application Counter] *CTL 5893...
  • Page 601 Main SP Tables-5 5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again. After selecting, press the "Original Type"...
  • Page 602 Main SP Tables-5 Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2". Even though you can change the initial settings of those network applications, the settings do not work. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 002 On Board USB 0: Disable, 1: Enable 5987...
  • Page 603 Main SP Tables-5 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 024 SDK/J Summary 025 SDK/J Application Info [Fusing Cont mode] Fusing Control Mode 5998 Turns the silent fusing warm-up mode on or off. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 001 fast/silent *ENG 0: Silent (less noise)
  • Page 604 Main SP Tables-6 5.7 MAIN SP TABLES-6 5.7.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) 6006 [ADF Adj.] ADF Adjustment Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF. 001 Side-to-Side Registration *ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 002 Side-to-Side Registration 003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]...
  • Page 605 Main SP Tables-6 [ADF Free Run] 6009 Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode. 001 Free Run Simplex Motion 002 Free Run Duplex Motion 003 Free Run Stamp Motion [Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment 6010 Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
  • Page 606 Main SP Tables-6 D086/D087 5-256...
  • Page 607 Main SP Tables-6 [DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment 6017 Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF. 001 DF Magnification Adj. *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] [Skew Correction Moving Setting] 6020 Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *ENG...
  • Page 608 Main SP Tables-6 [Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.] 6130 Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size. 001 A3T *ENG 002 B4T *ENG 003 A4T *ENG 004 A4Y *ENG 005 B5T *ENG 006 B5Y *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step] 007 DLT-T *ENG 008 LG-T...
  • Page 609 Main SP Tables-6 008 LG-T *ENG 009 LT-T *ENG 010 LT-Y *ENG 011 12" x 18" *ENG 012 Other *ENG [Jogger Fence Fine Adj] This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the 6132 stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
  • Page 610 Main SP Tables-6 [Staple Position Adjustment] Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805). 6133 + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side. - Value: Moves the staple position to the front side. Finisher *ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step] (B408/B804/B805) 6134 [Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment]...
  • Page 611 Main SP Tables-6 6135 [Folder Position Adj.] This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804. 001 A3T 002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step] 003 A4T + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease. - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
  • Page 612 Main SP Tables-6 6143 [FIN (TIG) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B793) Output Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. p.5-355 "Main SP Tables-9"in this section) 6144 [FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Output Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher. p.5-355 "Main SP Tables-9"...
  • Page 613 Main SP Tables-6 [OUTPUT Check] 6151 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the bridge unit (D386)/ side tray (D542) ( p.5-355 "Main SP Tables-9" in this section). [INPUT Check] 6152 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the shift tray (D388) ( p.5-355 "Main SP Tables-9"...
  • Page 614 Main SP Tables-6 [INPUT Check] Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the two-tray paper 6160 feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.5-355 "Main SP Tables-9" in this section) [OUTPUT Check] Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the two-tray paper 6161 feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.5-355 "Main SP...
  • Page 615 Main SP Tables-7 5.8 MAIN SP TABLES-7 5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) [Total SC Counter] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. 001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ] [SC History] Logs the SC codes detected. 7403 The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
  • Page 616 Main SP Tables-7 [Total Paper Jam Counter] 7502 Displays the total number of jams detected. 001 Total Jam * CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ] [Total Original Jam Counter] 7503 Displays the total number of original jams. 001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ]...
  • Page 617 Main SP Tables-7 013 Bank: Transport Sn1 *CTL 014 Bank: Transport Sn2 *CTL 017 Registration: ON *CTL 018 Fusing Entrance: ON *CTL For details, ( p.6-112 "Jam 019 Fusing Exit: ON *CTL Detection") 020 Paper Exit: ON *CTL 021 Bridge Exit: ON *CTL 022 Bridge Transport: ON *CTL...
  • Page 618 Main SP Tables-7 065 Duplex Exit: Off *CTL 066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In) *CTL 067 Duplex entrance : Off (Out) *CTL 100 Finisher Entrance: KIN *CTL 101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN *CTL 102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL 103 Finisher Exit: KIN *CTL 105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN *CTL...
  • Page 619 Main SP Tables-7 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: *CTL 203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP *CTL 204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP *CTL 206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP *CTL [Original Jam Detection] 7505 Displays the total number of original jams by location. 001 At Power On 003 Skew Correction: On 004 Registration Sensor: On 005 Original Exit Sensor: On...
  • Page 620 Main SP Tables-7 134 A5 SEF *CTL 141 B4 SEF *CTL 142 B5 SEF *CTL 160 DLT SEF *CTL 164 LG SEF *CTL 166 LT SEF *CTL 172 HLT SEF *CTL 255 Others *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ] [Plotter Jam History] 7507 Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
  • Page 621 Main SP Tables-7 [Original Jam History] 7508 Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams. 001 Latest 002 Latest-1 003 Latest-2 004 Latest-3 005 Latest-4 *CTL 006 Latest-5 007 Latest-6 008 Latest-7 009 Latest-8 010 Latest-9 Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF 7624 Selects the PM maintenance for each part.
  • Page 622 Main SP Tables-7 011 C Developer 012 Y Developer 013 ITB Unit 014 Belt Cleaning Unit 015 Fusing Unit [0 or 1 / 1 -] 016 PTR Unit 0: Not PM maintenance 1: PM maintenance 017 Waste Toner Bottle 018 Fusing Roller 019 Pressure Roller 7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version]...
  • Page 623 Main SP Tables-7 004 Page: C Drum Unit 005 Page: Y Drum Unit 006 Page: K Dev Unit 007 Page: M Dev Unit 008 Page: C Dev Unit 009 Page: Y Dev Unit 010 Page: K Developer 011 Page: M Developer 012 Page: C Developer 013 Page: Y Developer 014 Page: ITB Unit...
  • Page 624 Main SP Tables-7 031 Rotation: K Drum Unit 032 Rotation: M Drum Unit 033 Rotation: C Drum Unit 034 Rotation: Y Drum Unit 035 Rotation: K Dev Unit 036 Rotation: M Dev Unit [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 *ENG mm/step ] 037 Rotation: C Dev Unit...
  • Page 625 Main SP Tables-7 049 Rotation: Pressure Roller *ENG Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
  • Page 626 Main SP Tables-7 076 Rotation (%): PTR Unit Measurement (%): Toner Collection bottle Rotation (%): Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) 079 Rotation (%): Pressure Roller Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current printouts ÷ Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
  • Page 627 Main SP Tables-7 103 Page (%): ITB Unit 104 Page (%): Cleaning Unit 105 Page (%): Fusing Unit 106 Page (%): PTR Unit Page (%): Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) 108 Page (%): Pressure Roller [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear 7804 (Unit, [Color]) Clears the PM counter.
  • Page 628 Main SP Tables-7 012 Developer: Bk 013 Developer: M 014 Developer: C 015 Developer: Y 016 Developer: All 017 ITB Unit 018 Cleaning Unit 019 Fusing Unit 020 PTR Unit 021 Toner Collection Bottle 023 Fusing Roller(Heating Roller) 024 Pressure Roller 100 All [SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807...
  • Page 629 Main SP Tables-7 7835 [ACC Counter] 001 Copy ACC *CTL Displays the ACC exectuion times for each mode. 002 Printer ACC *CTL Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system. [DF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter] Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on 7852 the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter.
  • Page 630 Main SP Tables-7 011 C Developer *CTL 012 Y Developer *CTL 013 ITB Unit *CTL 014 Belt Cleaning Unit *CTL 015 Fusing Unit *CTL 016 PTR Unit *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 017 Toner Collection Bottle *CTL 018 Fusing Roller(Heating Roller) *CTL...
  • Page 631 Main SP Tables-7 [Prev. Unit PM Counter] 7906 (Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units. 001 Page: K Drum Unit 002 Page: M Drum Unit 003 Page: C Drum Unit 004 Page: Y Drum Unit 005 Page: K Dev Unit 006 Page: M Dev Unit...
  • Page 632 Main SP Tables-7 019 Pressure Roller Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units. 031 Rotation: K Drum Unit 032 Rotation: M Drum Unit 033 Rotation: C Drum Unit 034 Rotation: Y Drum Unit 035 Rotation: K Dev Unit 036 Rotation: M Dev Unit *ENG...
  • Page 633 Main SP Tables-7 Rotation: Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) 049 Rotation: Pressure Roller Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge. 061 Rotation (%): K Drum Unit 062 Rotation (%): M Drum Unit 063 Rotation (%): C Drum Unit 064 Rotation (%): Y Drum Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]...
  • Page 634 Main SP Tables-7 Rotation: Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) 079 Rotation: Pressure Roller Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in the counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield. 091 Page (%): K Drum Unit 092 Page (%): M Drum Unit 093 Page (%): C Drum Unit...
  • Page 635 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle Bk] 7931 Displays the toner bottle information for Bk. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 636 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle M] 7932 Displays the toner bottle information for M. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 637 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle C] 7933 Displays the toner bottle information for C. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 638 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle Y] 7934 Displays the toner bottle information for Y. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 639 Main SP Tables-7 7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for Bk. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for Bk.
  • Page 640 Main SP Tables-7 7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for M. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for M.
  • Page 641 Main SP Tables-7 7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for C. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for C.
  • Page 642 Main SP Tables-7 7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for Y. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for Y.
  • Page 643 Main SP Tables-7 [Unit Replacement Date] 7950 Displays the replacement date of each PM unit. 001 Image Transfer Belt 002 Cleaning Unit 003 Paper Transfer Unit 004 Fusing Unit 005 Toner Collection Bottle 006 K PCU (Drum Unit) *ENG 007 M PCU (Drum Unit) 008 C PCU (Drum Unit) 009 Y PCU (Drum Unit) Fusing Roller (Heating...
  • Page 644 Main SP Tables-7 007 Page: C Dev Unit 008 Page: Y Dev Unit 009 Page: K Developer 010 Page: M Developer 011 Page: C Developer 012 Page: Y Developer 013 Page: ITB Unit 014 Page: Cleaning Unit 015 Page: Fusing Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] 016 Page: PTR Unit...
  • Page 645 Main SP Tables-7 040 Rotation: M Developer 041 Rotation: C Developer 042 Rotation: Y Developer 043 Rotation: ITB Unit 044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: PTR Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] Measurement: Toner Collection bottle Rotation: Fusing Roller (Heating...
  • Page 646 Main SP Tables-7 021 Day: K Drum Unit 022 Day: M Drum Unit 023 Day: C Drum Unit 024 Day: Y Drum Unit 025 Day: K Dev Unit Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro each PM unit. 026 Day: M Dev Unit *CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]...
  • Page 647 Main SP Tables-7 Rotation: PCU (Drum Unit): C Rotation: PCU (Drum Unit): Y Rotation: Development Unit: Bk Rotation: Development Unit: M *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Rotation: Development Unit: C Rotation: Development Unit: Y 046 Rotation: Developer: Bk 047 Rotation: Developer: M *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 048 Rotation: Developer: C...
  • Page 648 Main SP Tables-7 Page: Development Unit: Page: Development Unit: 058 Page: Developer: Bk 059 Page: Developer: M *CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] 060 Page: Developer: C 061 Page: Developer: Y 7953 [Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk] Displays the PCDU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.
  • Page 649 Main SP Tables-7 011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80 012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100 013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30 014 25<=T<30: 55<=H<55 015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step] 016 25<=T<30: 80<=H<=100 017 30<=T: 0<=H<30 018 30<=T: 30<=H<55 019 30<=T: 55<=H<80 020 30<=T: 80<=H<=100 [Operation Env.
  • Page 650 Main SP Tables-8 5.9 MAIN SP TABLES-8 5.9.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
  • Page 651 Main SP Tables-8 Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server mode (from the document server window), or from Local storage another mode, such as from a printer driver or by (document server)
  • Page 652 Main SP Tables-8 Key for Abbreviations Abbreviation What it means "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application > More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more" AddBook Address Book Application Black & White Black Cyan ColCr Color Create ColMode Color Mode Comb...
  • Page 653 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1) IFax Internet Fax...
  • Page 654 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON. PJob Print Jobs Paper PrtJam...
  • Page 655 Main SP Tables-8 All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear. T:Total Jobs *CTL 8 001 These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. 8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 656 Main SP Tables-8 When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
  • Page 657 Main SP Tables-8 8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL 8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document 8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally. 8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs 8 025 S:Pjob/LS...
  • Page 658 Main SP Tables-8 8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL 8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document 8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL server. 8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs 8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL...
  • Page 659 Main SP Tables-8 8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to 8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL send files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network (attached to 8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax).
  • Page 660 Main SP Tables-8 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document 8 066 server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode. O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 661 Main SP Tables-8 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
  • Page 662 Main SP Tables-8 8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages 8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages 8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
  • Page 663 Main SP Tables-8 These counters count jobs, not pages. This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents stored on the document server. If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
  • Page 664 Main SP Tables-8 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) 8 131 scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not. S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 665 Main SP Tables-8 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 141 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
  • Page 666 Main SP Tables-8 8 15x 3 ACS These counters count jobs, not pages. If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted. If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
  • Page 667 Main SP Tables-8 T:Scan to Media 8 181 *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a Jobs media by the scanner application. S:Scan to Media [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 185 *CTL Jobs -001 B/W -002 Color -003 ACS 8 191 T:Total Scan PGS...
  • Page 668 Main SP Tables-8 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission 8 201 are not counted.
  • Page 669 Main SP Tables-8 Reading user stamp data is not counted. If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted. If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4. If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
  • Page 670 Main SP Tables-8 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF. Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be 8 231 1 Large Volume loaded in the ADF at one time.
  • Page 671 Main SP Tables-8 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
  • Page 672 Main SP Tables-8 8 24x 10: Color 8 24x 11: Other If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. 8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL...
  • Page 673 Main SP Tables-8 8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL 8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL 8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL 8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL 8 26x 1 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation 8 26x 2 Color Erase features have been selected at the operation 8 26x 3 Background panel.
  • Page 674 Main SP Tables-8 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all 8 301 applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441]. C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy...
  • Page 675 Main SP Tables-8 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and 8 306 with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
  • Page 676 Main SP Tables-8 8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi 8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi 8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi 8 31x 5 < 199dpi Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted. The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application.
  • Page 677 Main SP Tables-8 LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger. 8 391 Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. 8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL...
  • Page 678 Main SP Tables-8 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 424 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 425 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
  • Page 679 Main SP Tables-8 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption. Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page. Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes: Booklet Magazine...
  • Page 680 Main SP Tables-8 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 437 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications. Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The 8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
  • Page 681 Main SP Tables-8 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications. 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT...
  • Page 682 Main SP Tables-8 8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used. 8 451 8 Tray 7 Currently not used. 8 451 9 Tray 8 Currently not used. 8 451 10 Tray 9 Currently not used. T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
  • Page 683 Main SP Tables-8 8 46x 4 Thick 8 46x 5 Normal (Back) 8 46x 6 Thick (Back) 8 46x 7 OHP 8 46x 8 Other PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 471 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. 8 471 1 <...
  • Page 684 Main SP Tables-8 8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL 8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on. Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
  • Page 685 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Col 8 501 *CTL Mode These SPs count the number of pages P:PrtPGS/Col 8 504 *CTL printed in the Color Mode by the print Mode application. O:PrtPGS/Col 8 507 *CTL Mode 8 50x 1 B/W 8 50x 2 Mono Color 8 50x 3 Full Color 8 50x 4 Single Color 8 50x 5 Two Color...
  • Page 686 Main SP Tables-8 8 514 9 8 514 10 PCL5e/5c 8 514 11 PCL XL 8 514 12 IPDL-C 8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only 8 514 14 Other SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
  • Page 687 Main SP Tables-8 S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application. L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
  • Page 688 Main SP Tables-8 8 581 1 Total 8 581 2 Total: Full Color 8 581 3 B&W/Single Color 8 581 4 Development: CMY 8 581 5 Development: K 8 581 6 Copy: Color 8 581 7 Copy: B/W 8 581 8 Print: Color 8 581 9 Print: B/W 8 581 10 Total: Color 8 581 11 Total: B/W...
  • Page 689 Main SP Tables-8 8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output. 8 582 1 B/W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 583 F:Counter...
  • Page 690 Main SP Tables-8 8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output. 8 582 1 B/W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color O:Counter *CTL...
  • Page 691 Main SP Tables-8 SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 617 These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion. 8 617 1 SDK-1 8 617 2 SDK-2 8 617 3 SDK-3 8 617 4 SDK-4 8 617 5 SDK-5 8 617 6 SDK-6 T:FAX TX PGS...
  • Page 692 Main SP Tables-8 T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using I-Fax. F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I-Fax.
  • Page 693 Main SP Tables-8 The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted. If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
  • Page 694 Main SP Tables-8 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications. S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 675...
  • Page 695 Main SP Tables-8 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count. If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them. When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
  • Page 696 Main SP Tables-8 8 721 T:Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] S: Dvliv PGS/WSD *CTL 8 725 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode. x 1 B/W x 2 Color 8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 697 Main SP Tables-8 Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for black and other color toners. 8 771 1 Total 8 771 2 K 8 771 3 Y 8 771 4 M 8 771 5 C...
  • Page 698 Main SP Tables-8 Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1] These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time. 8 801 Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).
  • Page 699 Main SP Tables-8 CVr Cnt: 11-20% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 861 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 11% to 20%. 8 861 1 BK 8 861 2 Y 8 861 3 M 8 861 4 C CVr Cnt: 21-30%...
  • Page 700 Main SP Tables-8 Page/Toner Bottle *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 891 These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color. 8 891 1 BK 8 891 2 Y 8 891 3 M 8 891 4 C Page/Toner_prev1 *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 701 Main SP Tables-8 Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 921 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color. 8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk 8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y 8 921 3 Coverage (%) M 8 921 4 Coverage (%) C 8 921 11 Coverage /P: Bk 8 921 12 Coverage /P: Y...
  • Page 702 Main SP Tables-8 Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. 8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Includes time while machine is performing 8 941 5 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches.
  • Page 703 Main SP Tables-8 Copy application registrations 8 951 7 Copy Program with the Program (job settings) feature. Fax application registrations 8 951 8 Fax Program with the Program (job settings) feature. [0 to 255 / 0 / 255] Printer application registrations 8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program (job settings) feature.
  • Page 704 Main SP Tables-8 8 999 12 A3/DLT 8 999 13 Duplex 8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%) 8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%) 8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%) 8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%) 8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color 8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW 8 999 103 FAX Transmission 8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color...
  • Page 705 Main SP Tables-9 5.10 MAIN SP TABLES-9 5.10.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No. 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1...
  • Page 706 Main SP Tables-9 5803 13 Bypass Paper Length Detection See table 3 following this table. Paper not 5803 14 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 15 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor...
  • Page 707 Main SP Tables-9 5803 31 Toner End Sensor: M Toner end Toner remaining 5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C Toner end Toner remaining 5803 33 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner end Toner remaining Actuator not Actuator 5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor: Bk detected detected Actuator not...
  • Page 708 Main SP Tables-9 5803 54 3rd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock 5803 55 Paper Exit Fan:Lock Normal Lock 5803 56 Fusing Coil Fan: Lock Normal Lock 5803 57 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan: Lock Normal Lock 5803 60 ITB Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact Paper Transfer Contact Motor...
  • Page 709 Main SP Tables-9 5803 87 Fusing New Unit Detection Not new 5803 90 Zero-cross Signal Actuator not Actuator 5803 91 Fusing Rotation Sensor detected detected 5803 92 Fusing Pressue Release Sensor Not contact Contact Closed Open 5803 94 GAVD Open/Close Detection (LD5V ON) (LD5V OFF) 5803 100 Keycard: Set...
  • Page 710 Main SP Tables-9 Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) Switch 1 is used for tray set detection. 0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed Models Switch Location North America Europe/Asia 4 (bit0) 3 (bit1) 2 (bit2) 11" x 17" SEF A3 SEF (A3 SEF) (11"...
  • Page 711 Main SP Tables-9 Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) 0: ON, 1: OFF By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length EU/ASIA Sensor bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 HLT SEF A6 SEF HLT SEF A6 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF LT/LG SEF* A4 SEF LT/LG SEF*...
  • Page 712 Main SP Tables-9 ARDF (D540) Reading 6007 Description Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Paper not 6007 1 Paper detected Sensor) detected Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Paper not 6007 2 Paper detected Sensor) detected Original Length 3 (LG Detection Paper not 6007 3 Paper detected Sensor)
  • Page 713 Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 6007 12 Scan Entrance Secsor Paper detected detected Paper not 6007 13 Registration Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6007 14 Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open 6007 16 Lift Up Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open...
  • Page 714 Main SP Tables-9 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804, B805) Reading 6140 Description Paper not 6140 1 Entrance Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6140 2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 6140 3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full Paper not Paper 6140 4 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift detected*1...
  • Page 715 Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 6140 15 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected detected 6140 16 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP 6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP 6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit Limit 6140 19 DOOR SW Closed Open 6140 20 Stapler 1 Rotation...
  • Page 716 Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 6140 33 Arrival Sensor Paper detected detected 6140 34 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP 6140 35 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP 6140 36 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP Paper not 6140 37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not...
  • Page 717 Main SP Tables-9 *1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2 DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type Japan Europe North America North Europe *2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (B804 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet) Finisher".
  • Page 718 Main SP Tables-9 Not home 6139 6 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Home position position Paper not 6139 7 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected detected Staple Rotation Sensor 6139 8 Not home position Home position (Staple Rotation HP Sensor) Staple not 6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected...
  • Page 719 Main SP Tables-9 Bridge Unit (D386)/ Side Tray (D542) Reading 6150 Description Paper not 6150 1 Bridge/Left: Exit Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6150 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected 6150 3 Bridge/Left: Set Detection Not set 6150 4 Bridge/Left: Exit Cover Detection Closed Open 6150 5 Bridge/Left: Feed Cover Detection...
  • Page 720 Main SP Tables-9 Two-Tray PFU (D537)/ LCIT 2000 (D538)/ LCIT 1200 (D539) Reading 6160 Description Paper not 6160 1 Bank: Tray3: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6160 2 Bank: Tray4: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6160 3 Bank: Tray5: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not...
  • Page 721 Main SP Tables-9 5.10.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE Copier 5804 Display Description Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: 5804 3 Drum/Dev Motor: K: HighSpeed High Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: 5804 4 Drum/Dev Motor: K: MiddleSpeed Middle Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor-M: 5804 5 Drum/Dev Motor: K: LowSpeed Low Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor- C: 5804 10 Drum/Dev Motor: M: HighSpeed...
  • Page 722 Main SP Tables-9 Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: 5804 26 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: LowSpeed Low Speed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: High 5804 31 Fusing Exit Motor: HighSpeed Speed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Middle 5804 32 Fusing Exit Motor: MiddleSpeed Speed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Low 5804 33 Fusing Exit Motor: LowSpeed Speed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: LLow...
  • Page 723 Main SP Tables-9 Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: High 5804 67 Duplex Feed M:CW:HighSpeed Speed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Middle 5804 68 Duplex Feed M:CW:MiddleSpeed Speed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Low 5804 69 Duplex Feed Motor: CW: LowSpeed Speed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW: 5804 74 Duplex Feed M:CCW:HighSpeed High Speed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW: 5804 75 Duplex Feed M:CCW:MiddleSpeed...
  • Page 724 Main SP Tables-9 5804 97 1st Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Up 5804 98 1st Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Down 5804 99 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Up 5804 100 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Down 5804 102 Fusing Pressue Release Motor...
  • Page 725 Main SP Tables-9 5804 130 Toner Bottle Clutch: Bk Toner Bottle Clutch-K 5804 131 Toner Bottle Clutch: M Toner Bottle Clutch-M 5804 132 Toner Bottle Clutch: C Toner Bottle Clutch-C 5804 133 Toner Bottle Clutch:Y Toner Bottle Clutch-Y 5804 134 Toner Supply Pump: Bk Toner Supply Clutch: Bk 5804 135 Toner Supply Pump: M Toner Supply Clutch: M...
  • Page 726 Main SP Tables-9 5804 168 HST Sensor: C TD Sensor: C 5804 169 HST Sensor: Y TD Sensor: Y 5804 170 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner End Sensor: Bk 5804 171 Toner End Sensor: M Toner End Sensor: M 5804 172 Toner End Sensor: C Toner End Sensor: C 5804 173 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner End Sensor: Y...
  • Page 727 Main SP Tables-9 5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C 5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M 5804 196 RFID COM ON:K 5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y 5804 198 RFID COM ON: C 5804 199 RFID COM ON: M 5804 202 Scanner Lamp 5804 216 LD1: K 5804 217 LD2: K 5804 218 LD1: M...
  • Page 728 Main SP Tables-9 5804 231 HVPS: ChargeDC: K 5804 232 HVPS: ChargeDC: M 5804 233 HVPS: ChargeDC: C 5804 234 HVPS: ChargeDC: Y 5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed 5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed 5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed 5804 244 PP:Charge AC:M:HighSpeed 5804 245 PP:Charge AC:M:MiddleSpeed 5804 246 HVPS: ChargeAC: M: LowSpeed 5804 251 PP:Charge AC:C:HighSpeed...
  • Page 729 Main SP Tables-9 ARDF (D540) 6008 Display Description 6008 1 Pick-Up Motor Forward 6008 2 Pick-Up Motor Reverse 6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation 6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation 6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse...
  • Page 730 Main SP Tables-9 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408) 6144 Display Description 6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor 6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor 6144 3 Exit Motor 6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor 6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor...
  • Page 731 Main SP Tables-9 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (B804/B805) 6145 Display Description 6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor 6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor 6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor 6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor 6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor 6145 6 Shift Motor...
  • Page 732 Main SP Tables-9 Motor Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: 6145 22 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front Front Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: 6145 23 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear Rear 6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor 6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor 6145 26 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Positioning Roller Motor 6145 27 Punch Motor...
  • Page 733 Main SP Tables-9 Bridge Unit (D386)/ Side Tray (D542) 6151 Display Description Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Current Bridge: Feed Motor: Current switching 6151 1 Selection signal 6151 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Reset Bridge: Feed Motor:Reset 6151 3 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Enable Bridge: Feed Motor:Enable Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: High 6151 6 Bridge: Feed Motor: High Speed...
  • Page 734 Main SP Tables-9 Two-Tray PFU (D537)/ LCIT 2000 (D538)/ LCIT 1200 (D539) 6161 Display Description Feed Motor:High Speed 6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor:300mm/s (D537/D538/D387) Feed Motor: Increase Speed 6161 6 Bank1: Feed Motor:265mm/s (D537/D538/D387) Feed Motor: Middle Speed 6161 8 Bank1: Feed Motor:230mm/s (D537/D538/D387) Feed Motor: Low Speed 6161 9 Bank1: Feed Motor:215mm/s...
  • Page 735 Main SP Tables-9 5.10.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE SP1-XXX (Service Mode) 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 0: Disable 1: Enable No I/O Timeout Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
  • Page 736 Main SP Tables-9 Collate Collate A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured. If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect. bit 3 0: Enable 1: Disable [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.
  • Page 737 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 003 Bit Switch 3 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 0: Disable 1: Enable [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"...
  • Page 738 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 005 Bit Switch 5 Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable panel. If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and bit 0 Punch Type from the operation panel.
  • Page 739 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 006 Bit Switch 6 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 008 Bit Switch 8 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without Disable Enable requiring User Code...
  • Page 740 Main SP Tables-9 1003 [Clear Setting] Initialize Printer System 1003 1 Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode. 1003 3 Delete Program 1004 [Print Summary] Print Summary 1004 1 Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). 1005 [Display Version] Disp.
  • Page 741 Main SP Tables-9 [Data Recall] 1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the current setting. 1101 1 Factory 1101 2 Previous *CTL 1101 3 Current 1101 4 ACC [Resolution Setting] 1102 Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
  • Page 742 Main SP Tables-9 [Gamma Adjustment] 1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu. 1104 1 Black: Highlight 1104 2 Black: Shadow 1104 3 Black: Middle 1104 4 Black: IDmax 1104 21 Cyan: Highlight 1104 22 Cyan: Shadow 1104 23 Cyan: Middle 1104 24 Cyan: IDmax *CTL...
  • Page 743 Main SP Tables-9 [Save Tone Control Value] Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma Adj.” menu item as the 1105 current setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the data currently stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory storage location.
  • Page 744 Main SP Tables-9 5.10.4 SCANNER SP MODE SP1-xxx (System and Others) [Compression Type] 1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ] 1004 1 Compression Type *CTL 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR [Erase margin] Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
  • Page 745 Main SP Tables-9 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) [Compression Level (Gray-scale)] 2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 2021 1 Level 3 (Middle Image Quality) [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ] 2021 2 Level 2 (High Image Quality) [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ] 2021 3 Level 4 (Low Image Quality)
  • Page 746 Firmware Update 5.11 FIRMWARE UPDATE To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller box. 5.11.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE There are several types of firmware as shown below.
  • Page 747 Firmware Update Scanner Controller Board Scanner Websupport Controller Board Websupport WebUapl Controller Board WebUapl 5.11.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards: Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the slot with the power on.
  • Page 748 Firmware Update 5.11.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE Preparation If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D086" folder onto the card. If the card already contains folders up to "D086", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D086xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
  • Page 749 Firmware Update Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update. The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch "OpPanel".
  • Page 750 Firmware Update Recovery after Power Loss If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated successfully.
  • Page 751 Firmware Update 5.11.5 UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR APP2ME PROVIDER Follow this procedure to update App 2 Me if a new version is available. Push the [User/Tools] key on the operation panel. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, Step 3 and Step 4 are required. Otherwise, skip to step 5.
  • Page 752 Firmware Update App2Me and all other running applications on the VM card must be shut down before removing the VM card in order to update the firmware, back up NVRAM, install the browser unit, or execute application move or undo with SP5873. After the VM card is re-inserted, App2Me (and any other VM card applications used by the customer) must be switched on after the machine is switched on.
  • Page 753 Firmware Update 13. Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit. 14. You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed". 15. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen. 16. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch. 17.
  • Page 754 Firmware Update Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct module is not on the SD data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install card) again. Module mismatch – Module SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD on SD card is not for this card is for another machine.
  • Page 755 Installing Another Language 5.12 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel. Switch the copier main power switch off.
  • Page 756 Installing Another Language Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language. If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse. Touching "Exit (0)" returns you to the previous screen. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch "...
  • Page 757 Installing Another Language 10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download. Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading. The following occur at the time the language is downloading: The operation panel switches off.
  • Page 758 Reboot/System Setting Reset 5.13 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET 5.13.1 SOFTWARE RESET You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures: Turn the main power switch off and on. Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.
  • Page 759 Reboot/System Setting Reset Copier Setting Reset Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults. Press User Tools/Counter Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings. You must press first. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings.
  • Page 760 Downloading Stamp Data 5.14 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times: After the hard disks have been replaced. The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.
  • Page 761 NVRAM Data Upload/Download 5.15 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.15.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked Do SP5990-001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off.
  • Page 762 NVRAM Data Upload/Download 5.15.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BICU is defective.
  • Page 763 Address Book Upload/Download 5.16 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.16.1 INFORMATION LIST The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information Registration No. Select Title User Code Folder E-mail Local Authentication Protection Code Folder Authentication Fax Destination Account ACL Fax Option New Document Initial ACL Group Name LDAP Authentication...
  • Page 764 Address Book Upload/Download 5.16.3 UPLOAD Turn off the main power switch of the main machine. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1). Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2. Turn on the main power switch.
  • Page 765 Using the Debug Log 5.17 USING THE DEBUG LOG 5.17.1 OVERVIEW This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
  • Page 766 Using the Debug Log Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press Select “3 SD Card”...
  • Page 767 Using the Debug Log Example 2: To Specify an SC Code Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670. For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. “Troubleshooting”.
  • Page 768 Using the Debug Log 1025 (MCS) 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA) 2224 (BICU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB) 4600 3000 (UCS) 3300 (PTS) (GPS-PM) 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys) 2224 (BICU) 4126 (DCS) 2000 (NCS) The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).
  • Page 769 SD card. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
  • Page 770 Using the Debug Log 5.17.5 DEBUG LOG CODES SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot.
  • Page 771 Card Save Function 5.18 CARD SAVE FUNCTION 5.18.1 OVERVIEW Card Save: The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 772 Card Save Function doing this, Card Save option will appear in the “List/Test Print” menu. Press “Exit” to exit SP Mode. Press the “User Tools/Counter” button. Select “Printer Features”. 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New).
  • Page 773 Card Save Function 11. Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu. 12. Press the “Printer” button. 13. Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel. 5-423 D086/D087...
  • Page 774 Card Save Function 14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below. 15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
  • Page 775 Card Save Function 5.18.3 ERROR MESSAGES Card Save error messages: Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize. Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot. No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job. Write error: Failed to write to the card.
  • Page 777 TROUBLESHOOTING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...
  • Page 779 SC Tables 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SC TABLES 6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS Summary The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
  • Page 780 SC Tables After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the main power switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected.
  • Page 781 SC Tables Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 440 - Around drum 460 - Unit 480 - Others 500 - Paper feed Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex 520 - Paper transport 530 - Fan motor 540 - Fusing Paper feed / Fusing 560 -...
  • Page 782 SC Tables Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 900 - Counter Others 920 - Memory 990 - Others D086/D087...
  • Page 783 SC Tables 6.1.2 SC1XX: SCANNING Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Exposure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate. Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Exposure lamp connector defective Standard white plate dirty Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty Check and clean the scanner mirror(s) and scanner lens.
  • Page 784 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition during operation. Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIO and HP sensor disconnected Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner...
  • Page 785 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. Dirty exposure glass or optics section SBU board defective Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Scanner motor defective Clean the exposure glass, white plate, mirrors, and lens.
  • Page 786 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) IPU error The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the BICU is detected. Defective BICU Defective connection between BICU and SBU Check the connection between BICU and SBU. Replace the BICU. The machine detects an error during an access to the Ri.
  • Page 787 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Serial Number Mismatch Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code. NVRAM defective BICU replaced without original NVRAM Check the serial number with SP5-811-002. If the stored serial number is incorrect, contact your supervisor. D086/D087...
  • Page 788 SC Tables 6.1.3 SC 2XX: EXPOSURE Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the specified time after turning on or changing speed Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor.
  • Page 789 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the laser diode is firing. Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor Defective polygon motor driver board Check or replace the harness.
  • Page 790 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD0 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD0 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [C]: LD0 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [Y], [C] is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
  • Page 791 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: K The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position [K]. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.
  • Page 792 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: M The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position [M]. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.
  • Page 793 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) LD error: K LD error: Y LD error: M LD error: C The BICU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization. Worn-out LD Disconnected or broken harness of the LD Replace the harness of the LD.
  • Page 794 SC Tables 6.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Charge P.P. output error [K] Charge P.P. output error [M] Charge P.P. output error [C] Charge P.P. output error [Y] The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less for 0.2 seconds after the charge AC has turned on.
  • Page 795 SC Tables 6.1.5 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 2 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3020-002 for twenty counts.
  • Page 796 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3020-004 (default: 0.5V) for 10 counts.
  • Page 797 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor adjustment error: K TD sensor adjustment error: M TD sensor adjustment error: C TD sensor adjustment error: Y During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.5V) ±...
  • Page 798 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Drum/Development motor error: K Drum/Development motor error: M Drum/Development motor error: C Drum/Development motor error: Y The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor turned on. Overload on the drum/development motor Defective drum/development motor Defective harness...
  • Page 799 SC Tables 6.1.6 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING - 3 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ID sensor adjustment error When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC400". The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is more than the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3324-005 or less than the value (default: 3.5V) specified with SP3324-006.
  • Page 800 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer belt contact motor error The image transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. Dirty image transfer belt contact sensor Defective image transfer belt contact motor Disconnected connector of image transfer belt contact sensor or motor...
  • Page 801 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper transfer unit contact error The paper transfer unit contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. Defective paper transfer unit contact sensor Defective paper transfer unit contact motor Broken +24V fuse on PSU Defective IOB...
  • Page 802 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Toner transport motor error The LOCK signal is not detected for 2 seconds when the transport motor turns on. Toner transport motor overload Disconnected or broken harness Defective toner transport motor Opened +24V fuse on the PSU Defective interlock switch Check or replace the harness.
  • Page 803 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) High voltage power: Image transfer/ paper transfer bias output error An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the separation, image transfer bet or paper transfer roller. High voltage leak Broken harness Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit Defective high voltage supply unit...
  • Page 804 SC Tables 6.1.7 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper Tray 1 error Paper Tray 2 error When the tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise, (if the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset the tray.
  • Page 805 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 3 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) For the paper feed unit: When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds For the LCT: SC 503-01 occurs if the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift or lower the tray.
  • Page 806 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 3 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times. For the paper feed unit: When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
  • Page 807 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 4 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) For the two-tray paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
  • Page 808 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 5th tray lift malfunction (optional LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs: When the tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go on after the tray lift motor has turned on to lift the paper tray. When the tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go off after the tray lift motor has turned on to lower the paper tray.
  • Page 809 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing fan error The IOB does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the fusing fan. Defective fusing fan motor or connector disconnection Defective IOB Check the connector and/or replace the fusing fan motor. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor-front/rear error...
  • Page 810 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) IH inverter fan error The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds while the IH inverter fan turns on. Disconnected harness Overload on the IH inverter fan motor Defective IH inverter fan motor Defective IOB Check or replace the harness.
  • Page 811 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper exit fan error The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds while the paper exit fan turns on. Disconnected harness Overload on the paper exit fan motor Defective paper exit motor Defective IOB Check or replace the harness.
  • Page 812 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing/Paper exit motor error The IOB does not receive the lock signal 2 seconds after turning on the fusing/paper exit motor. Motor overload Defective fusing/paper exit motor Check or replace the harness. Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.
  • Page 813 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 1 The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds after the IH inverter turned on. The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 90 seconds after the IH inverter turned on.
  • Page 814 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error) During stand-by mode or a print job, the temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile reaches 250 °C. Defective PSU Defective IOB Defective BICU Defective fusing control system Related SC code: SC 543 Replace the PSU.
  • Page 815 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power. The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 816 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 2 The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds after the IH inverter on. The temperature at the end of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 89 seconds after the IH inverter turned on.
  • Page 817 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (hardware error) The temperature detected by the heating roller thermistor reaches 250°C or more. Defective PSU Defective IOB Defective BICU Defective fusing control system Replace the PSU. Replace the IOB.
  • Page 818 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross frequency error When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs.
  • Page 819 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat (software error) The temperature detected by the pressure roller thermistor stays at 230°C or more for 1 second. Defective PSU Defective IOB Defective BICU Replace the PSU. Replace the IOB. Replace the BICU.
  • Page 820 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller fusing lamp consecutive full power When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure roller fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 300 seconds or more. Broken pressure roller fusing lamp Defective pressure roller thermistor Replace the pressure roller lamp.
  • Page 821 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermistor error: Center The temperature at the center of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does not reach 0°C for 37 seconds. Loose connection of the thermistor Defective thermistor Check if the thermistor is firmly connected.
  • Page 822 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) IH inverter current error at power on The output current from the IH inverter does not reach the proper value when the IH inverter turns on. Disconnected power input terminal 1 and 2 Defective IH inverter Defective IH coil unit Defective fusing unit...
  • Page 823 SC Tables 6.1.8 SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Mechanical counter error: K Mechanical counter error: FC This SC is only for NA models. The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1". Disconnected mechanical counter Defective mechanical counter Check or replace the mechanical counter.
  • Page 824 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher communication error Paper tray unit communication error While the IOB communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs. The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
  • Page 825 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 1 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device.
  • Page 826 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 3 A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device. Counter device control board defective Backup battery of counter device defective Replace the counter device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 4 A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
  • Page 827 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD Card Error Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken. There is no DESS module in the machine. No expanded authentication module Defective SD card No DESS module...
  • Page 828 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Communication error of the remote service modem (Embedded RCG-M) Authentication error The authentication for the Embedded RCG-M fails at a dial up connection. Incorrect SP settings -001 Disconnected telephone line Disconnected modem board Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password (SP5816-157).
  • Page 829 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect dial up connection -001: Program parameter error -002: Program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection. Caused by a software bug No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.
  • Page 830 SC Tables Engine board mismatch error Engine board and controller mismatch detected. Wrong engine board installed. Wrong controller board installed. Check the type of engine board and controller board. Replace the BICU. Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup After powering on the machine, the communication circuit between the controller and the operation panel is not opened, or communication with...
  • Page 831 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) RFID: Communication error Communication error occurs when the RFID starts to communicate with the RFID receptor. Retry of RFID communication fails three times after the machine has detected the RFID communication error. Defective RFID reader and writer Disconnected ASAP I/F No memory chip on the toner cartridge...
  • Page 832 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) RFID: Unit check error The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges have not been installed in the machine. Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory address command error...
  • Page 833 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) GAVD communication error The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization. A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication. The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer shortage.
  • Page 834 SC Tables 6.1.9 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher jogger motor error The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses. The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 835 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above. Check for blockages in the stack feed-out motor mechanism. Replace the stack feed-out HP sensor and/or stack feed-out motor. Replace the finisher main board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher exit guide plate motor error...
  • Page 836 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) above. Check for blockages in shift motor mechanism. Replace the shift tray HP sensor and/or shift motor Replace the finisher main board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher corner stapler motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 837 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher stapler movement motor error For 1000-sheet (booklet) finisher The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the stapler motor turned on. (first detection: jam error, consecutive twice detection SC code). Motor overload Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor Loose connection of the stapler movement motor...
  • Page 838 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 1000-sheet (booklet) finisher: Tray lift motor error Motor overload Loose connection of the shift tray motor Defective shift tray motor Check the connections to the shift tray motor. Replace the shift tray motor. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher punch motor error...
  • Page 839 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher folder plate motor error The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 840 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper position sensor slide motor error The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective Defective motor Check the connections to the paper position sensor slide motor.
  • Page 841 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper position sensor slide motor error The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective Defective motor Check the connections to the paper position sensor slide motor.
  • Page 842 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Bridge unit error The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit. Defective connector Broken harness Check the connections between the bridge unit and the machine. Install a new bridge unit. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher error...
  • Page 843 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Upper limit switch error (D372) The upper limit switch of the 500-sheet finisher (D372) is pushed due to tray lift error or some problems. Upper limit switch pulled up Defective upper limit swtich Check the harness.
  • Page 844 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Rear fence motor error (D372) The rear jogger fence motor of the 500-sheet finisher (D372) is not operating. Rear jogger motor drive is obstructed (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) The rear jogger fence motor harness loose or broken Rear jogger fence HP sensor dirty, loose, defective Rear jogger fence motor defective Check or replace the harness.
  • Page 845 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Stack feed-out motor error The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stack feed-out belt for a certain time after the stack feed-out belt has moved to its home position. The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off for a certain time after the stack feed-out belt has moved from its home position.
  • Page 846 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Positioning roller arm motor error The positioning roller HP sensor does not turn on or off for a certain time at power-on. The positioning roller HP sensor does not turn on or off for a certain time when the positioning roller returns to its home position from the lower position.
  • Page 847 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher corner stapler motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. For 500-sheet finisher The stapler HP sensor does not detect "ON"/"OFF" signal even the stapler moves from the "OFF"/"ON"...
  • Page 848 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher stapler movement motor error For 500-sheet finisher The stapler HP sensor does not detect "OFF" signal even the stapler moves from the "ON" position for 0.35 seconds. The stapler HP sensor does not detect "ON" signal even the stapler moves from the "OFF"...
  • Page 849 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Stack pressure solenoid error The stack pressure solenoid in the finisher is not operating. Solenoid harness loose, broken Solenoid obstructed Stack height sensor dirty, harness loose, broke Solenoid defective Stack height sensor defective Check or replace the solenoid harness.
  • Page 850 SC Tables 6.1.10 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Energy saving I/O sub-system error The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error. Controller board defective Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fatal kernel error Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing.
  • Page 851 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the [0F30] PCI configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked. [0F31] Replace the BICU.
  • Page 852 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established, though the wireless LAN board is detected. Loose connection Check the connection. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected The wireless LAN/Bluetooth card is not detected after communication is established, but the wireless LAN board is detected.
  • Page 853 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) USB interface error The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error. Defective USB driver Loose connection Check the connection. Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 1 A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
  • Page 854 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Other error: A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted. [31] Same as SC991 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 2 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
  • Page 855 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Initialization error The controller detects that the hard disk fails. HDD not initialized Defective HDD Reformat the HDD. Replace the HDD. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD.
  • Page 856 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly. Defective HDD Defective controller Replace the HDD. Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: CRC error While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission fails.
  • Page 857 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot. Install the SD card. Turn the main switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card access error -13 to -3: File system error Other number: Device error An error report is sent from the SD card reader.
  • Page 858 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail data error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization. Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD Turn the main switch off and on. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007).
  • Page 859 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Delete All error 2: Data area An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (D377). The logical format for the HDD fails. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 860 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error 5 Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine -005 Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 99 -099 Other than the above causes Ask your supervisor.
  • Page 861 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) File format converter error The file format converter does not respond. Defective file format converter Replace the file format converter. 6-83 D086/D087...
  • Page 862 SC Tables 6.1.11 SC9XX: MISCELLANEOUS Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Electric counter error Abnormal data in the counters. Defective NVRAM Defective controller Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller. Replace the NVRAM. Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) External Controller Error 1 External Controller Error 2 External Controller Error 3...
  • Page 863 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) External Controller Error 6 While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other station was detected.
  • Page 864 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software performance error The software makes an unexpected operation. Defective software Defective controller Software error Turn the main switch off and on. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware. See Note 1 at the end of the SC table. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software continuity error...
  • Page 865 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Operation panel management records exceeded An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images managed in the service layer of the firmware. This can occur if there if there are too many application screens open on the operation panel.
  • Page 866 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Application function selection error The application selected by the operation panel key does not start or ends abnormally. Software (including the software configuration) defective An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated Check the devices necessary for the application program.
  • Page 867 SC Tables Note 1 If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data.
  • Page 868 Process Control Error Conditions 6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS 6.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Developer Successfully initialization is completed successfully completed. A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization.
  • Page 869 Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Possible Causes/Action Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed Vcnt error 3 Vcnt is less than 4.7V. Defective TD sensor Vt target settings are not correct. Toner density error The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable”...
  • Page 870 Process Control Error Conditions 6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check. 00000000 = YYCCMMKK SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result) No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action Process control Successfully self-check Check the Vsg adjustment. See the "Vsg completed successfully Adjustment Result"...
  • Page 871 Process Control Error Conditions No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action When the K5 is more ID sensor than the value of ID sensor pattern density is too high coefficient SP3-362-003 or less or low. (K5) than the value of ID sensor or shutter is defective. maximum/ SP3-362-004, the Same as 53...
  • Page 872 Process Control Error Conditions Vsg Adjustment Result SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result) No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action Vsg adjustment is correctly done. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign material) Dirty transfer belt Scratched image transfer belt Defective ID sensor Poor connection ID sensor Vsg cannot be...
  • Page 873 Process Control Error Conditions 6.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y) This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color has an error (M, Y or C). Result Description Note...
  • Page 874 Troubleshooting Guide 6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6.3.1 IMAGE QUALITY The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this product. D086/D087 6-96...
  • Page 875 Troubleshooting Guide 6-97 D086/D087...
  • Page 876 Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment. Test Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment). Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).
  • Page 877 Troubleshooting Guide Countermeasure list for color registration errors After Executing SP2-111-003 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007 Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern Defective BICU White image, Abnormal image,...
  • Page 878 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The main scan registrations of M, Defective laser optics housing unit C, Y are shifted by more than ±15 Defective BICU mm from the main scan Replace the laser optics housing unit. registration of K. Replace the BICU.
  • Page 879 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Do SP2-111-001 or -002. After Executing SP2-111-001 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007 Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure White image, Abnormal image, Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Low density Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern...
  • Page 880 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Low image density on the output Low pattern density Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx). The main scan registrations of M, No defective component C, Y are shifted by more than Defective laser optics housing unit Defective BICU ±1.4 mm from the main scan...
  • Page 881 Troubleshooting Guide Others Skew correction upper limit error Defective BICU Defective laser optics housing unit Replace the BICU. Replace the laser optics housing unit. After Executing SP2-111-001 Result: "0" in SP2-194-007 Result: No color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The main scan registration of K is...
  • Page 882 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Defective BICU Incorrect SP value Replace the laser optics housing unit. Replace the ID sensor. Replace the BICU. Adjust the value with SP2-182-004 to -021. The sub scan registrations of M, Defective image transfer belt C, Y are shifted.
  • Page 883 Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.3 STAIN ON THE OUTPUTS If a stain appears at the edge of the output, do the following procedure. Execute the fusing cleaning mode with SP1123-002. It takes 160 seconds to complete the fusing cleaning mode. Make a sample copy, and then check if a stain appears on the output. 6.3.4 STACK PROBLEM IN THE 1-BIN TRAY If a stack problem occurs on the 1-bin tray, raise the guide on the 1-bin tray.
  • Page 884 Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.5 PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals). [A]: Paper feed direction [B]: Problems at regular intervals Colored spots at 47-mm intervals: Development roller Abnormal image at 51-mm intervals: ITB drive or bias roller...
  • Page 885 Troubleshooting Guide Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error 6-107 D086/D087...
  • Page 886 Troubleshooting Guide Countermeasure 1 Check if the toner supply tube is bent or disconnected. Straighten the toner supply tube or connect it correctly. Countermeasure 2 Remove the target color toner bottle. Disconnect the toner supply tube from the toner pump unit. Remove the blocked toner in the toner supply tube with a vacuum cleaner.
  • Page 887 Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.7 SOLID IMAGE OR HALFTONE IMAGE ERROR The toner density of a solid image or halftone image may not be uniform ([A]: problem output, [B]: normal output) if a large amount of sheets is printed at low coverage. If this occurs, follow the countermeasure below.
  • Page 888 Troubleshooting Guide Problem Prevention Procedure Set the setting of SP3-516-025 (Refresh Mode; Job End Area Coefficient) to "0.5". 6.3.8 FAULTY CLEANING Black or color lines (2-3mm) Possible Cause: Wear of the cleaning blade at a specific point by image creation in the same place many times.
  • Page 889 Troubleshooting Guide Band Image Between 20mm and 30mm Possible Cause: Developer wear with time Solution: Replace the developer or the development unit. 6-111 D086/D087...
  • Page 890 Jam Detection 6.4 JAM DETECTION 6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY SP7-507 shows the paper jam history. CODE: Indicates the jam code. SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code. TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001). DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred. D086/D087 6-112...
  • Page 891 Jam Detection 6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location. Jam Code Display Description Display 7504 3 Tray 1: ON Paper is not fed from tray 1. 7504 4 Tray 2: ON Paper is not fed from tray 2. 7504 5 Tray 3: ON Paper is not fed from tray 3 (LCT).
  • Page 892 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display 7504 20 Paper Exit: ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper. Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not 7504 21 Relay Exit: ON detect paper. Relay sensor (bridge unit) does not 7504 22 Relay Transport: ON detect paper.
  • Page 893 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display 7504 58 LCT Sensor LCT sensor does not turn off. 7504 59 7504 60 Exit Sensor Paper exit sensor does not turn off. Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not 7504 61 Relay Exit Sensor turn off.
  • Page 894 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display after the stack feed-out belt has returned to the home position. 7504 104 Stack height sensor does not detect Finisher Tray Lift paper after the lower tray has lifted up. 7504 105 R1-R2 Motor (B408) Stack height sensor still detects paper after the lower tray has lifted down.
  • Page 895 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Paper does not reach the finisher Finisher Entrance: 7504 191 entrance sensor or stays at the finisher R1-R4 EUP (B804/B805) entrance sensor. Paper does not reach the proof tray exit Finisher Proof Exit: 7504 192 sensor or stays at the proof tray exit R1-R4...
  • Page 896 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Upper tray limit sensor does not turn off after the upper tray has moved down. Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn on/off after the jogger motor has turned Finisher Jogger Motor: 7504 200 R8-R12 Stack feed out belt HP sensor does not EUP (B804/B805)
  • Page 897 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Fold bottom fence HP sensor does not turn on/off after the fold unit bottom fence lift motor has turned on. Stack junction gate HP sensor does not turn on/off after the stack junction gate motor has turned on.
  • Page 898 Jam Detection Sensor Locations D086/D087 6-120...
  • Page 899 Electrical Component Defects 6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 6.5.1 SENSORS The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the IOB. Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name "Open Cover" is Open displayed. Right Door Open CN204/1 Switch "Open cover"...
  • Page 900 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Drum Gear Position Open/ CN222/A2 SC380/SC396 Sensor-K Shorted Drum Gear Position Open/ CN222/ A5 SC381/SC397 Sensor-M Shorted Drum Gear Position Open/ CN222/ A8 SC382/SC398 Sensor-C Shorted Drum Gear Position Open/ CN222/ A11 SC383/SC399...
  • Page 901 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Remaining paper Tray 1 Paper Height CN224/ Open/ volume on the LCD is Sensor 1, 2 B2, B5 Shorted wrong. Remaining paper Tray 2 Paper Height CN224/ Open/ volume on the LCD is Sensor 1, 2 B10, B13 Shorted...
  • Page 902 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open/ TD Sensor - K CN227/A7 SC372 Shorted CN227/ Open/ TD Sensor - M SC373 Shorted Open/ TD Sensor - C CN227/B7 SC374 Shorted CN227/ Open/ TD Sensor - Y SC375 Shorted Open...
  • Page 903 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Humidity Sensor 25, 27 Shorted Printed image has some problems such as rough image, dirty background, weak image or poor fusing. Open/ Thermopile CN209/16 SC541 Shorted Thermistor Open/ CN212/22 SC551 - Heating Roller Shorted...
  • Page 904 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Original Length CN313/5 Open/ Original paper size Sensor 2 Shorted cannot be detected. Original Length CN313/2 Open/ Original paper size Sensor 3 Shorted cannot be detected. Open SC120 CN318/2 Scanner HP Sensor Shorted SC121...
  • Page 905 Electrical Component Defects 6.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS Power Supply Unit Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 115V 220V - 240V No response. (5V power to the PSU is not 15A/125V 8A/250V supplied.) No response. (5V power to the BICU and 10A/125V 6.3A/250V controller is not supplied.)
  • Page 906 Electrical Component Defects IH Inverter Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 115V 220V - 240V 15V power to the IH coil unit is not supplied. 15A/125V 8A/250V SC689 occurs. 115°C No response 115°C No response 15V power to the IH coil unit is not supplied. 1A/250V SC689 occurs.
  • Page 907 Scanner Test Mode 6.6 SCANNER TEST MODE 6.6.1 SBU TEST MODE Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key.
  • Page 909 ENERGY SAVING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...
  • Page 911 Energy Save 7. ENERGY SAVING 7.1 ENERGY SAVE 7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.
  • Page 912 Energy Save Return to Stand-by Mode Low Power Mode The recovery time depends on the model and the region. 10 to 15.7 sec. Off/Sleep Mode Recovery time. 15 sec. Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept. If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.
  • Page 913 Energy Save 7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode. 8941-001: Operating mode 8941-002: Standby mode 8941-003: Panel off mode 8941-004: Low power mode 8941-005: Off/sleep mode With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of energy that is used by the machine.
  • Page 914 Energy Save Machine SP8941: Time at Time at Running Power Power Condition Machine Start End (min.) time consumption consumption Status (min.) (hour) Spec. (W) (KWH) ( - )/60 ( x )/1000 Operating 001: Operating Time 21089.0 21386.0 1081.8 5.35 002: Stand by Standby (Ready)
  • Page 915 Paper Save 7.2 PAPER SAVE 7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2.
  • Page 916 Paper Save To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter. The total counter counts all pages printed. For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2. For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3. The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
  • Page 917 D086/D087 SERVICE MANUAL 006185MIU APPENDIX & ACCESSORIES...
  • Page 921 D086/D087 SERVICE MANUAL (APPENDIX & ACCESSORIES) 006185MIU...
  • Page 923 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 925 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 927 LEGEND PRODUCT COMPANY CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN D086 MP C3001 LD630C Aficio MP C3001 C9130 D087 MP C3501 LD635C Aficio MP C3501 C9135 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 11/2010 Original Printing...
  • Page 929 D086/D087 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES...
  • Page 931 D086/D087 APPENDICES TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS ........... 1-1     GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............1-1     1.1.1 MAIN FRAME ..................1-1     1.1.2 PRINTER ................... 1-5     1.1.3 SCANNER ..................1-6     SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ..............1-7  ...
  • Page 932 APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ....2-1     MAINTENANCE TABLES ................2-1     2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS ..........2-1     Mainframe ..................... 2-1   ARDF (D541) ..................2-4   Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D537) ............2-4   1200-sheet LCT (D539) ................ 2-5  ...
  • Page 933 Copier ....................3-399   Table 1: Paper Height Sensor ............3-404   Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) ..........3-405   ADF (D541) ..................3-406   1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (B793) ..........3-407   1000-Sheet Finisher (B408) .............. 3-410   500-Sheet Finisher (D372) ..............

  • Page 935: Appendix: Specifications

    APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 937: General Specifications

    General Specifications 1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1.1 MAIN FRAME Configuration: Desktop Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system Print Process: 4 drums tandem method Number of scans: Scan: 600 dpi Resolution: Print: 600 dpi Scan: 600dpi / 10bits/pixel Gradation: Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel Original type:...
  • Page 938 General Specifications C2.5b: 15 cpm (color/black & white) from By-pass OHP, Glossy (1200 dpi) C2.5a: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white) C2.5b 17.5 cpm (color/black & white) C2.5a/ b First copy (normal Color: 8 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) mode): Black & white: 5 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF) Warm-up time: 26 seconds or less (23°C) Standard tray: 550 sheets x 2 + 100...
  • Page 939 General Specifications Standard exit tray: 500 sheets or more (face down)* Shift Tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m 1-bin Tray: 125 (80 g/m Output Paper Capacity: 500-sheet finisher 500 (80 g/m 1000-sheet finisher: 250 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m 1000-sheet booklet finisher: 100 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m *1: T6200, A4 LEF Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets...
  • Page 940 Less (*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT. The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology. Dimensions (W x D x H): Copier: 670 x 671 x 760 mm (26.4" x 26.4" x 29.9") Copier + PFU or LCT: 670 x 671 x 1020 mm (26.4"...

  • Page 941: Printer

    General Specifications 1.1.2 PRINTER PCL 6/5c RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) Adobe PostScript 3 (optional) Printer Languages: PDF Direct (optional) IPDS (optional) PictBridge (optional) MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF (optional) PCL 5c: 300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) PCL 6: 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) / 1200 Resolution and...

  • Page 942: Scanner

    General Specifications USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard USB Host (PictBridge): Optional Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard Host Interfaces: Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional IEEE802.11a/g (Wireless LAN): Optional Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching) 1.1.3 SCANNER Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan...

  • Page 943: Supported Paper Sizes

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES 1.2.1 PAPER FEED North America BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 A3 W...
  • Page 944 Supported Paper Sizes Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 Executive 7.25" x 10.5" Executive 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8" x 10" 267 x 390mm 16K SEF 195 x 267mm...
  • Page 945 Supported Paper Sizes Remarks: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Supported: the user specifies the paper size. Supported: depends on a technician adjustment Not supported SM Appendix D086/D087...

  • Page 946: Europe/ Asia

    Supported Paper Sizes Europe/ Asia BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 A3 W 12" x 18" A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A4 SEF...
  • Page 947 Supported Paper Sizes Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 Executive 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8" x 10" 267 x 390mm 16K SEF 195 x 267mm 16K LEF...

  • Page 948: Paper Exit

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2.2 PAPER EXIT 1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple, SS: Saddle Stitch, 2/3 P: 2/3 Holes Punch, 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch 1000-sheet booklet finisher Paper Size (W x L) 2/3 P...
  • Page 949 Supported Paper Sizes 1000-sheet booklet finisher Paper Size (W x L) 2/3 P Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10"...

  • Page 950: 1000-Sheet Finisher And 500-Sheet Finisher

    Supported Paper Sizes 1000-Sheet Finisher and 500-Sheet Finisher MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple 500-sheet 1000-sheet finisher Size finisher Paper 1-Bin Shift (W x L) A3 W 12" x 18" 297 x A3 SEF 420 mm 210 x A4 SEF 297 mm...
  • Page 951 Supported Paper Sizes 500-sheet 1000-sheet finisher Size finisher Paper 1-Bin Shift (W x L) Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" 8.5" x Legal SEF 14" Government 8.25" x Legal SEF 14" Half Letter 5.5" x 8.5" Executive 7.25"...
  • Page 952 Supported Paper Sizes 500-sheet 1000-sheet finisher Size finisher Paper 1-Bin Shift (W x L) Custom 4.125" x Com10 Env. 9.5" Monarch 3.875" x Env. 7.5" 114 x C6 Env. 162 mm 162 x C5 Env. 229 mm 110 x DL Env. 220 mm Remarks: Supported...

  • Page 953: Platen/Ardf Original Size Detection

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION Platen ARDF Platen ARDF Size (width x length) [mm] Inches Inches Metric Metric A3 (297 x 420) L B4 (257 x 364) L A4 (210 x 297) L A4 (297 x 210) S B5 (182 x 257) L B5 (257 x 182) S A5 (148 x 210) L...
  • Page 954 Supported Paper Sizes 8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) 8K (267 x 390) 16K L (195 x 267) 16K S (267 x 195) 7.25" x 10.5" (Executive) 10.5" x 7.25" (Executive) *1: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message “Can-t detect original size”...

  • Page 955: Software Accessories

    Software Accessories 1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs 1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM 2: Scanner/PostScript® Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM. An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install. 1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS MacOS8.6 to 9.x, Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003,...

  • Page 956: Scanner And Lan Fax Drivers

    Software Accessories 1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS Printer Windows 2000, XP, Server MacOS8.6 to 9.x, MacOSX10.1 Language 2003, Vista, 7 or later Network TWAIN LAN-FAX The Network TWAIN and LAN Fax drivers are provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM. This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC.

  • Page 957: Utility Software

    Software Accessories 1.3.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE Software Description A font management utility with screen fonts for the Font Manager printer (2000/XP/Server 2003/7) This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM A printer management utility for network Smart Device Monitor for Admin administrators.

  • Page 958: Optional Equipment

    Optional Equipment 1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1.4.1 ARDF (D541) Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Simplex Weight 40 to 128 g/m (10 to 34 lb.) Paper Size/Weight: Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Duplex Weight 52 to 105 g/m (14 to 28 lb.) Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m...

  • Page 959: Paper Feed Unit (D537)

    Optional Equipment 1.4.2 PAPER FEED UNIT (D537) Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty) Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays Paper Weight: 60 to 256 g/m (16 to 68 lb.) Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)

  • Page 960: Lct 1200-Sheet (D539)

    Optional Equipment 1.4.4 LCT 1200-SHEET (D539) Paper Size: A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF Paper Weight: 60 g/m to 216 g/m (16 lb to 57 lb.) Tray Capacity: 1,200 sheets (80 g/m , 20lb) Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 30%, 10%, End) Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier/printer) Power Consumption:...
  • Page 961 Optional Equipment 52 to 163 g/m (14 to 43 lb.) Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m (17 to 24 lb.) Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled [Proof tray] 100 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or less 50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or more Tray Capacity: [Shift tray] 1000 sheets: A4, 8.5"...

  • Page 962: 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)

    Optional Equipment 1.4.6 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) Upper Tray A3 to A6 Paper Size: 11" x 17" to 5.5" x 8.5" Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m (16 to 42 lb.) 250 sheets (A4 LEF/8.5" x 11" SEF or smaller) Paper Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 8.5"...

  • Page 963: 500-Sheet Finisher (D372)

    Optional Equipment A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 to 10 1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear) Staple positions: 2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left) Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer) Power Consumption: 50 W Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)

  • Page 964: 500-Sheet Finisher

    Optional Equipment 500-Sheet Finisher Target Line Speed 77 mm/sec. to 205 mm/sec Target CPM 35 cpm 12"x18", A3 SEF to A6 SEF, DLT to HLT SEF Face-down Output Size Shift sizes: A3 SEF to B5 SEF A5, B6, A6 SEF labels possible 52 g/m (45 K) to 157 g/m (135 K)

  • Page 965: Bridge Unit (D386)

    Optional Equipment Stacking Non-Stapling Mode Vertical: 15 mm or less Horizontal: 15 mm or less Jogging Precision 2 to 30 Sheets 2 mm 31 to 50 Sheets 3 mm Dimensions (W x D x H) 396 x 551 x 276 mm (15.6 x 21.7 x 10.9 in.) Weight 12 kg (26.4 lb) 1.4.8 BRIDGE UNIT (D386)

  • Page 966: Shift Tray (D388)

    Optional Equipment 1.4.9 SHIFT TRAY (D388) 250 sheet (A4/ 8 " x 11 " or smaller: 80g/m / 20 lbs) Paper Capacity: 125 sheet (B4 8 " x 11 " or larger: 80g/m / 20 lbs) Standard sizes A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT Paper Size: Non-standard sizes Width: 90 to 305 mm...
  • Page 967 APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 969: Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    Maintenance Tables 2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES 2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES 2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 3 copies / original (prints/job) Ratio 30% Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect Mainframe Item 150K 200K...
  • Page 970 Maintenance Tables Item 150K 200K 300K 450K Remarks Developer-K Developer-C, M, Y Transfer Image Transfer Belt-cleaning Unit Image Transfer Belt R: 600K Unit Paper Transfer Roller Unit Toner Collection Bottle 150K Fusing Heating Roller -Bearing S552R Pressure Roller -Bearing S552R Entrance guide plate Exit guide plate Exit separate plate...
  • Page 971 Maintenance Tables Item 150K 200K 300K 450K Remarks Vertical Transport Dry cloth Sensor Paper Feed Sensor Dry cloth Pick-up Belt Dry cloth Feed Roller Dry cloth Separation Roller Dry cloth Fusing Entrance Dry cloth Sensor Fusing Exit Sensor Dry cloth Paper Dust Container Duplex Unit Inverter Roller...

  • Page 972: Ardf (D541)

    Maintenance Tables ARDF (D541) Item 120K Remarks Sensors Blower brush Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if Platen Sheet Cover required.) White Plate Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear Grease G501 Transport Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Exit Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth;...

  • Page 973: 1200-Sheet Lct (D539)

    Maintenance Tables 1200-sheet LCT (D539) Item Remarks Feed Roller Dry cloth Separation Roller Dry cloth Pick-up Roller Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor Dry cloth Relay Sensor Dry cloth Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth 2000-sheet LCT (D538) Item Remarks Feed Roller...

  • Page 974: 1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (B793)

    Maintenance Tables 1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher (B793) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush 1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher Punch Kit (B807) Items Remarks Punch Chads Discard chads. 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush...

  • Page 975: Bin Tray (D536)

    Maintenance Tables 1 Bin Tray (D536) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Tray Damp cloth Sensor Blower brush Bearing S552R Bridge Unit (D386) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Shift Tray (D388) Items Remarks Tray Damp cloth SM Appendix D086/D087...

  • Page 976: One-Tray Paper Feed Unit (D387)

    Maintenance Tables One-tray Paper Feed Unit (D387) Item Remarks Feed Roller Dry cloth Separation Roller Dry cloth Pick-up Roller Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor Dry cloth Relay Sensor Dry cloth Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth Side Tray (D542) Items Remarks Rollers...

  • Page 977: Others Yield Parts

    Maintenance Tables 2.1.2 OTHERS YIELD PARTS The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine’s targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).

  • Page 979: Appendix Sp Mode Tables

    APPENDIX SP MODE TABLES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 981: System Sp1-Xxx

    System SP1-xxx 3. APPENDIX: SP MODE TABLES 3.1 SYSTEM SP1-XXX 3.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1or Thick 2 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode.
  • Page 982 System SP1-xxx 020 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG 021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG 024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG [Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment 1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode.
  • Page 983 System SP1-xxx 008 Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step] Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step] 012 By-pass: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 013 By-pass: Middle Thick *ENG 014 By-pass: Thick 1...
  • Page 984 System SP1-xxx [Reload Permit Setting] 1101 Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode. Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the pre-rotation start temperature. Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG [120 to 180 / 150 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the reload target temperature of the heating roller.
  • Page 985 System SP1-xxx Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is determined as warm state. Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 65 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
  • Page 986 System SP1-xxx Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) in the black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state. Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 70 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
  • Page 987 System SP1-xxx [Feed Permit Setting] 1102 Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing. Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center Specifies the subtractive temperature of the heating roller (center) for the paper feed permission. Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the subtractive temperature of the heating roller (end) for the paper...
  • Page 988 System SP1-xxx Delta:End:Sp.1 Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Press:Sp.1 012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center:Sp.2 Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Delta:End:Sp.2 Temp.:Upper *ENG...
  • Page 989 System SP1-xxx printing. Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing. Plain2:FC:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 160 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full color printing.
  • Page 990 System SP1-xxx 019 Thick1:BW:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step] 020 Thick1:BW:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 021 Thick2:FC:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step] 022 Thick2:FC:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 023 Thick2:BW:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 991 System SP1-xxx 041 Envelop:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 180 / 1 deg/step] 042 Envelop:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Plain1:FC:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain1:FC:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain1:BW:Center:Low *ENG...
  • Page 992 System SP1-xxx Thick1:FC:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step] Speed Thick1:FC:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Thick1:BW:Center:Low *ENG [120 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step] Speed Thick1:BW:Press:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special1:FC:Center:Low *ENG...
  • Page 993 System SP1-xxx 127 Plain2:Glossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step] 128 Plain2:Glossy:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 129 M-thick:Glossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step] 130 M-thick:Glossy:Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 131 OHP:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 994 System SP1-xxx 1106 [Fusing Temp. Display] 001 Center [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature of the heating 002 End roller. 003 Pressure [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature of the heating 004 Pressure End roller.
  • Page 995 System SP1-xxx 1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.] Center *ENG [120 to 180 / 150 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job. Press *ENG [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job. 1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing] Temp.: Threshold: Low...
  • Page 996 System SP1-xxx Correction:Sp. Job High Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step] Correction:Sp. 1112 [Repeat Temperature Correction] Control Time 1 *ENG [0 to 300 / 100 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the threshold time for entering the repeat temperature correction mode after the first sheet of paper has reached to the registration roller.
  • Page 997 System SP1-xxx Temp.:M-thick:Center:1 *ENG [-15 to 15 / -5 / 0.1 deg/step] Specifies the correction temperature of the heating roller for middle thick paper when the operation time of the machine is in the interval between control time 1 and control time 2. Temp.:M-thick:Press:1 *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]...
  • Page 998 System SP1-xxx Temp.:Plain:Center: *ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step] Level2 Specifies the correction temperature for the level 2 of the job image control in black and white printing mode. 1113 [Curl Correction] [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] Execute Pattern *ENG 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On...
  • Page 999 System SP1-xxx Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid:No *ENG [0 to 200 / 50 / 1 deg/step] Decurl Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in middle humidity. Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:H-humid:No *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1 deg/step] Decurl Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in high humidity. CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]...
  • Page 1000 System SP1-xxx 1114 [Heat Storage Status] Temp.:Threshold:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for the heat storage status. Temp.:Threshold:Atmosphere *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature inside the machine for the heat storage feedback control.
  • Page 1001 System SP1-xxx Press Reference Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the standard temperature for the pressure roller during the heat storage FB control. Temp. Correction Lower *ENG [-30 to 0 / -2 / 1 deg/step] Limit Specifies the lower llimit temperature for the heat storage FB control.
  • Page 1002 System SP1-xxx Specifies the target temperature of the pressure roller center area after the fusing temperature has reached the reload temperature. End Uniform Start *ENG [0 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:B4 Specifies the target temperature of the pressure roller end arear after the B4 paper feeding has finished.
  • Page 1003 System SP1-xxx [CPM Down Setting] 1124 Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode. Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature condition. If the fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode.
  • Page 1004 System SP1-xxx High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 230 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3 Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size. High:2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 233 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3 Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
  • Page 1005 System SP1-xxx High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:B5:Press Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 paper size. High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A5:Press Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A5 paper size.
  • Page 1006 System SP1-xxx 1131 [Continues Print Mode Switch] [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Productivity priority Feed Permit Condition *ENG 1: Fusing quality priority 1 2: Fusing quality priority 2 Selects the paper feed permission type. 1132 [Maximum Duty Switch] [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 Control Method Switch *ENG...
  • Page 1007 System SP1-xxx 151 Htg Roller:Ctr Diff2 *ENG 152 Htg Rolloer:Ctr Det2 *ENG [0 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] 153 Htg Roller:Ctr Corr2 *ENG 154 Htg Roller:End Diff2 *ENG 155 Htg Roller:End Det2 *ENG [0 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] 156 Htg Roller:End Corr2 *ENG 157 Press Roller Temp Value2...
  • Page 1008 System SP1-xxx 1151 [Pressure Setting] Pressure Change ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Enables or disables the pressure switching control for the fusing unit. 0: OFF , 1: ON Pressure Position1 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 420 / 10 msec/step] Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure position 1.
  • Page 1009 System SP1-xxx 102 Pressure:Thin *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 103 Pressure:M-thick *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 104 Pressure:Thick1 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 105 Pressure:Thick2 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 106 Pressure:Thick3 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 1010 System SP1-xxx 160 Pressure:Thin:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] Pressure:Thick4 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for thick 4 paper. 0: Depression position (no pressure) 1: Position 1 (less pressure) 2: Position 2 3: Position 3 (strongest pressure)
  • Page 1011 System SP1-xxx 1153 [Fuser Cleaning] 001 Compulsion execution Execute the fusing cleaning mode. Operation interval *ENG [1 to 300 / 0 / 1 K/step] Adjusts the execution interval for the fusing cleaning mode. 1K= 100 sheets Control Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 180 / 1°C/step] Specifies the heating roller temperature for the fusing cleaning mode.
  • Page 1012 System SP1-xxx 012 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Low *ENG 013 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG 014 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG 015 Duplex CW:Thick1:Low *ENG 016 Duplex CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG 017 Duplex CW:Thick2:Low *ENG 018 Duplex CW:Thick3:Low *ENG 019 Duplex CCW:Normal:High *ENG 020 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] 021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high...
  • Page 1013 System SP1-xxx 036 Feed:Middle thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 037 Feed:Middle thick:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step] 038 Feed:Middle thick:High *ENG 039 Feed:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 040 Feed:Thick 1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 1014 System SP1-xxx 071 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step] 072 Fusing: High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step] 073 Fusing: Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.4 / 0.01 %/step] 074 Fusing: Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.7 / 0.01 %/step] 075 TransferMot:High...
  • Page 1015 System SP1-xxx 110 MOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG 111 COpcDevMot:1200 *ENG [– 7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step] 112 YOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG 120 Long:Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step] 121 Long:Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] Long:Registration:Middle *ENG Thick:High...
  • Page 1016 System SP1-xxx 135 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.7 / 0.01 %/step] 136 Long:Fusing:Thick 2:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.7 / 0.01 %/step] 137 Long:Fusing:Thick 3:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.7 / 0.01 %/step] 1902 [Amplitude Control] 001 Execute Execute drum phase adjustment.
  • Page 1017 System SP1-xxx 009 By-pass Solenoid Re-ON *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 010 By-pass Feed Clutch ON *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 012 Feed Solenoid ON: Thick *ENG [–10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm/step] 013 Feed Clutch OFF: Thick *ENG 014 Feed Clutch ON: Thick...
  • Page 1018 System SP1-xxx [Fan Cooling Time Set] 1950 Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end. 002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG 006 Main Suction Fan *ENG 007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG 008 PSU Fan *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] 009 Fusing IH Coil Fan *ENG 010 IH Power Supply Fan...
  • Page 1019 System SP1-xxx 1952 [Fan Control Off Mode Time Set] 001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min./step] 1953 [Extra Fan Control] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG 0: Off, 1: On Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.
  • Page 1020 System SP1-xxx Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Fusing *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] IH Coil Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:IH *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Power Supply Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Second Duct *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Third *ENG...

  • Page 1021: System Sp2-Xxx

    System SP2-xxx 3.2 SYSTEM SP2-XXX 3.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) [Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) 2005 Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&FINE: Low speed Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
  • Page 1022 System SP2-xxx 015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step] 016 HVP:Plain *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step] 017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step] 018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step] [Charge AC Voltage] Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment...
  • Page 1023 System SP2-xxx [Charge AC Current: LL] Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for LL (Color) 2007 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for LL environment (Low temperature and Low humidity). DFU 001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 0.68 / 0.01 mA/step] 002 Environmental Target: M *ENG 003 Environmental Target: C...
  • Page 1024 System SP2-xxx [Charge AC Current: MH] Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH (Color) 2010 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MH environment (Middle temperature and High humidity). DFU 001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 0.74 / 0.01 mA/step] 002 Environmental Target: M *ENG 003 Environmental Target: C...
  • Page 1025 System SP2-xxx 2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity. [1 to 5 / – / 1 /step] Current Environmental: 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m *ENG Display 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m 3: MM (11.3 <...
  • Page 1026 System SP2-xxx Humidity: Display [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m /step] Displays the previous environmental condition, which is measured in absolute Previous Environmental: *ENG humidity. Display [1 to 5 / – / 1 /step] 1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH Displays the previous temperature.
  • Page 1027 System SP2-xxx 012 AH Threshold S *ENG [0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1 g/m /step] 013 Non-use Time *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 10 min/step] 2015 [Charge AC Control:Result] 001 Bk *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Success 002 M *ENG...
  • Page 1028 System SP2-xxx 003 Main Mag.: Low Speed: Bk *ENG [0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step] 004 Main Mag.: High Speed: M *ENG 005 Main Mag.: Medium Speed: M *ENG 006 Main Mag.: Low Speed: M *ENG 007 Main Mag.: High Speed: C *ENG 008 Main Mag.: Medium Speed: C *ENG...
  • Page 1029 System SP2-xxx 010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG 011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step] 012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step] 013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step] 014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick...
  • Page 1030 System SP2-xxx 2106 [Polygon Rotation Time] Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation. DFU 001 Warming-Up *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step] 002 Job End *ENG [Image Parameter] 2107 001 Image Gamma Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 002 Shading Correction Flag *ENG [Test Pattern]...
  • Page 1031 System SP2-xxx Specifies the color for the test pattern. [1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step] 005 Color Selection 1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan 006 Density: Bk Specifies the color density for the test pattern. 007 Density: Ma [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] 008 Density: Cy 0: Lightest density...
  • Page 1032 System SP2-xxx 2112 [TM/ID Sensor Check] ID Sensor Check FA This SP is used to check the ID sensors at 001 Execute the factory. The results of this SP are displayed in SP2140 to SP2145. [Skew Adjustment] Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y. 2117 These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when SC285 occurs.
  • Page 1033 System SP2-xxx [Skew Adjustment Display] 2119 Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor. 001 M *ENG 002 C *ENG [–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 003 Y *ENG [Thick Paper Skew Adj] Not used 2120 Selects the skew adjustment for thick paper.

This manual is also suitable for:

Aficio mp c3501

Table of Contents